海量文库 文档专家
您现在的位置:首页 > 初中教育 > 学科竞赛学科竞赛


发布时间:2013-11-01 08:07:03  


【1】"What's your name?" "My name is Gina. " “你叫什么名字?”“我叫吉娜。”

两人初次见面互相询问姓名时可用这个句型。如想反问时可说: And you?或者And what's your name?如: A: Hello. What's your name? B: My name is Ann Read. And you? /And what's your name?

A: I'm Han Mei.

【2】Hello! 你好!

Hello一般可作为熟人、朋友、青年人之间的招呼用语,语气较随便,译为―您好‖;此外打电话或遇熟人时也可用。译为―喂‖。在表示问候或唤起注意时,有时可用Hi来代替Hello, 显得更为随便。如: A: Hello/Hi, Jane! 你好,简!B: Hello/Hi, Jim!你好,吉姆!

【3】How do you do! 你好!用于初次见面的人打招呼。如:A:How do you do! B:How do you do!

【4】—What's your phone number?你的电话号码是多少?—It's 2842942. 2842942。

What's…number?是用来对自行车牌号、房间号、电话号码、身份证号码等进行提问的,答语是It's+号码。此外还有另一种提问方式: What's the number of…?

如:What's the number of your telephone? 你的电话号码是多少?

【5】family name= last name first name = given name

Mr. Miss. Mis.只能用在family name(last name)前。

【6】My name is Jenny= I am Jenny.



1.Your family name is Moore, and what’name?


3. .

4.L ’s an English book.

5. name is Bruce.

6. is 422-2785.

7. days in a week.

8.You can know the time by your watch or c .

9. students are in the classroom. There are no boys.



1.I’m a singer and ___________________(I ) name’s Dale.

2.Is ______________________________(she) book new?

3.It’s nice ____________________(meet) you.

4.Let ____________________(we)learn and read English.

5.What’s the ________________________(boy) name?

6.His ________________________(one) name is Jones.

7.Six and eight ____________________(be) fourteen.

8.In the small village(村子), there are only nine ________________(family) now.

9.How are ____________________________(your)?

10.Can you _____________________(answer) the question.


( )1.-What’s your telephone number? -___________ 278-106.

A.I’m B.It C.It’s D.Is it

( )2.-Is that a ruler? -No, ____. A.it is B.it isn’t C.that is D.that isn’t

( )3.All the ________ have __________ own meanings.

A.name, its B.names, its C.name, their D.names, their

( )4.The girl’s name is Maria Schuartz, so her ___________ name’s Maria.

A.last B.family C.first D.mother

( )5.Each of the students under 15 years old doesn’t have _________ ID card.

A.anB.the C.any D.a

( )6.Please listen and __ the nice pictures. A.numbers B.meets C.look D.number ( )7.That’

s a girl. Her name is ___________.


A.Wang Xiaoling B.Wang Xiao Ling C.Wang xiaoling D.Wang xiao ling

( )8.__________ a list of the boys’ names and the girls’ names.

A.Take B.Make C.Writes D.Do

( )9.Let’s __________ the name game. A.sing B.work C.play D.dance

( )10.-Thank you very much.-_______________________.

A.No thanks B.Thank you. C.Not at all D.That’s right


My is Lucy. I‘m a I‘m I‘m now. My teacher is a Her name is Wang Pei. She is an teacher. David is my friend. He is English. He is fourteen. David and I in Class 3, Grade1. I am Number I in Row 2. He is in the same row. His English is . He has(有) a parrot. name is Polly.

( )1.A.name B.number C.class D.row

( )2.A.man B.woman C.girl D.boy

( )3.A.Japan B.China C.American D.America

( )4.A.at the school B.at school C.in the school D.good

( )5.A.boy B.man C.English D.woman

( )6.A.Japanese B.English C.Chinese D.good

( )7.A.are B.am C.is D.be

( )8.A.in B.at C.× D.on

( )9.A.well B.OK C.good D.fine

( )10.A.It’s B.Its C.It is D.its


Julia’s Chinese name is Liu Min, she is in Class 6 and her telephone number is 756-4321. She has a brother, his name is Adam. He is a tall boy, he has(有) some good friends at school. Julia and her brother like apples very much. Julia’s favourite colour is white, but Adam likes black. Black is his favourite colour. They are in China(中国) now, their Chinese teacher is Miss Wang. She is a good teacher.


( )1.Adam has a Chinese name.

( )2.Miss Li is an English teacher.

( )3.Adam is Julia’s brother.

( )4.Julia is tall.

( )5.Julia likes white and Adam likes black.

( )6.They’re in China now.

( )7.Julia’s telephone number is 765-4321.

( )8.Julia and Adam like apples.

( )9.Julia has some good friends.

( )10.Their Chinese teacher is good.


【1】"Is this your pencil?"和"Is that your backpack?" "这是你的钢笔吗?"和“那是你的背包吗?”


(2)这两个句型都是一般疑问句,Is this…?指问话人问较近的人或物,Is that…?指问话人问较远的人或物,回答都是用it来代替this和that,以避免重复使用this和that。如:

①Is this an apple?这是苹果吗?Yes, it is. 是的,它是。

②Is that an orange?那是桔子吗?No, it isn't. It's an apple. 不,它不是桔子。它是苹果。

(3)变一般疑问句就是将陈述句中的is, am ,are提前,句号改为问号。变否定句就是在is, am, are后加not。

【2】What's this in English?这个用英语怎么说?

这是一个含有特殊疑问词"What(什么)"的特殊疑问句。in English可作―在英语中‖或―用英语‖解。―in+某种语言‖表示―用……语言说‖的意思。如:

What's this in English?这个用英语怎么说? It's a key. 这是一把钥匙。

【3】How do you spell pen?你怎样拼“pen”这个词?



—How is your sister? 你的妹妹身体好吗?

—She's very well. 她很好。(well在这里是形容词,表示―身体好‖)

How do you like this new film? 你觉得这部新电影怎么样?

How much is your backpack? 你的背包多少钱?

(3)How do you spell it?= How can I spell it?

【4】Call Alan at 4953539 Call sb. at …拨打……找某人



1. -Is t_________________ your pencil? -Yes, it is.

2. How do you s________________ pencil?

3. What's this in E___________________?

4. Call Mike a___________________ 365-4639.

5. I have a set of k________________________.


1. He is a boy and she is a _________________. (boy的对应词)

2. Jenny is a girl. ________________ family name is Green. (she)

3. This is a boy. ______________________ name is Wang Gang. (he)

4. _____________________ name is Lisa Barnes. (I)

5. What's _______________________ name, please? (you)

三、 选择填空。

( )1. -Is this your pencil? -Yes, ________. A. it's B. it is C. its D. is it

( )2. -Is this _____ book? -Yes, it's ____ English book. A. a; a B. an; an C. an, a D. a; an

( )3. What's this ____? A. in english B. In English C. in an English D. in English

( )4. -How do you spell ring? -________. A. It's a ring B. r-i-N-g C. R-I-N-G D. a ring

( )5. Is that ________ pencil case? A. he B. him C. his D. he's

( )6. Her watch ________ in her backpack. A. am B. is C. are D. be

( )7. Please call Jenny ________ 536-4428. A. in B. to C. on D. at

( )8. Is this _____? A. gold your ring B. your gold ring C. your ring gold D. you gold ring

( )9. How do you spell ________ baseball? A. the B. a C. this D. /

( )10. -Is this ________ computer game? -Yes, _______ is _______ computer game.

A. his; it, me B. your; this, his C. your; it, my D. you; it, my


My name is Tina. I'm in Class 4, Grade 2. I'm in Row 3. Kate is my friend. She is in my class, too. She is in Row 1. My father has a beautiful car. The number is B-047968. Her father has a beautiful car, too. The number is E-0-double 4-double 9-5. Her father often drives her to my home. We are good friends. We are both fifteen.

( )1. Are Tina and Kate both students?

A. No, they aren't. B. No, they are. C. Yes, they aren't. D. Yes, they are.

( )2. What row is Tina in?

A. She is in Row Four. B. She is in Row Two. C. She is in Row One. D. She is in Row Three.

( )3. What's the number of Kate's father's car?

A. It's B-047968. B. It's E-032143. C. It's B-032146. D. It's E-044995.

( )4. How old is Tina?

A. She is fifteen. B. She is thirteen. C. She is fourteen. D. She is twelve.

( )5. What's the number of Tina's car? It's ______.

A. B, zero, three, two, one, four, three B. E, zero, six, four, two, eight, four

C. B, zero, four, seven, nine, six, eight D. E, zero, seven, seven, nine, nine, five


Look at the child over there. H______(1) name is Jim Green. He is an English b______(2). He is my

g______(3) friend. M______(4) name is Liu Ying. This is o______(5) school. It's No. 2 Middle S______(6). My father is a t______(7) at the school. Jim is eleven. I'm twelve. He is in C______(8) Two. We are in the s______(9) class. We like our school v______(10) much.

1. ___________ 2. ___________ 3. ___________ 4. ___________ 5. ___________

6. ___________ 7. ___________ 8. ___________ 9. ___________ 10. ___________



【1】He’s Dave. 他是戴夫。

He‘s 是 he is 的缩写。英文中有些词,如:人称代词、疑问代词、疑问副词常与其后面的be动词缩写在一块。如: I‘m =I am 我是 It‘s =it is 它是 They‘re =they are 他们是 She‘s =she is 她们是 You‘re=you are 你们是 What‘s =what is是什么 Where‘s =where is 在哪儿

【2】Thanks for the photo of your family. 很感谢你寄给我的全家福照片。

Thank sb for 为……而感谢sb,thanks 表示感谢,后接表示原因的介词for,因此thank for 后只能接名词,代词和动词的ing形式。例如: Thank for making English fun. 感谢你把英语教得那么有趣。

当然Thanks for ……也可以说成Thank you very much for …… 而thanks to ……并不是感谢之意,常译作―幸亏‖―由于‖。例如: Thanks to the teacher‘s help, I can do it. 幸亏有老师的帮助,我才能做它(这件事)

【3】 Bring a photo of your family to school… 带一张家人的照片到学校……

bring 带来。例:She often bring her mother to the party. 她带着她的母亲来参加晚会。

Bring me a glass of water. 给我拿一杯水来。

【4】I need my hat, my ID card, my notebook and my pencils. 我需要我的帽子,身份证,笔记本和铅笔。 need v. 需要

1) need + sth./sb. ―需要……‖ 例如:She really needs these video cassettes.

2) need to do sth. ―需要做……‖ 例如:I need to listen to some relaxing music.

3) need doing sth. = need to be done ―需要被…‖ 例如:These flowers need watering.=These flowers need to be watered.


① 以y结尾的专有名词,变为复数时,直接加-s。eg the little Marys 小玛丽们

② 以下以f, fe结尾的名词变为复数时,直接加-s。

roof – roofs (房顶) chief – chiefs (首长) safe – safes (保险箱)

③ 以下以o结尾的名词:

以辅音加o结尾的加es, 如:tomato – tomatoes potato – potatoes

以元音加o结尾的加s, 如:zoo – zoos radio – radios video – videos

缩写的词加s, 如:photo – photos piano – pianos kilo – kilos

3) 名词复数的不规则变化:

sheep – sheep deer – deer Chinese – Chinese Japanese – Japanese fish –fish man – men woman – women foot – feet tooth – teeth child – children mouse – mice


5) 只有复数形式的名词

scissors(剪刀), trousers(裤子), glasses(眼镜), savings(积蓄)earnings(工资), arms(武器), thanks(感谢),goods(货物),clothes(衣服), chopsticks(筷子)

6) 一些名词以s结尾,但一般用单数

economics(经济学),physics(物理),tennis etc.



例如: advice(意见),labor(劳动),information(信息、消息),furniture(家具),traffic(交通)。 B:一些表示度量的名词复数形式在使用时表示单数含义,因此谓语动词用单数。

例如: Two years isn‘t a long time to us. 两年的时间对我们来说不长。


1) -‘s所有格形式的构成

① 大多数单数名词后加 's 构成其所有格形式。

例如: Sally‘s address 莎莉的地址my cousin‘s nationality 我表弟的国籍

② 以 s 结尾的名词(特别是名词复数),在 s 后加 '

例如: the teachers' office老师们的办公室three minutes‘ walk 三分钟的路程

③ 复合词和由两个或两个以上名词表示共有关系的词组,在最后一个名词后加所有格符号's。 例如: Mary and Linda's birthday 玛丽和琳达的生日

④如果两个或两个以上名词表示分别的拥有关系,则在每个名词后分别加 'S。

例如: Mary's and Linda's birthdays 玛丽的生日和琳达的生日

2)以of加名词组成 of 属格

例如: the color of the sweater毛衣的颜色

the name of the movie 电影的名字

3)在以下情况中,只能用of与 's 构成双重所有格

① 所有格所修饰的名词前面有一个数量词或一个指示代词that时,要用双重所有格(数量词包括 a,two,some,no,any,few等)。

例如: an aunt of Mary's(=one of Mary's aunts)玛丽的一个阿姨

some photos of my mother‘s 我母亲的一些照片 that son of Mr. Smith's 史密斯先生的那个儿子 that smile of the boy's 那个孩子的微笑


① 当名词所有格所修饰的名词在前面已出现过,为避免重复,往往省略。

例如: I need your trumpet, not Bill's. 我需要你的喇叭,不是比尔的(喇叭)。

② 当被所有格修饰的名词表示店铺、教堂或某人的家时,这一名词省略。

例如: I'm going to the tailor's to get my dress. 我要去裁缝店拿我的衣服。

We'll visit St. Paul's (cathedral). 我们将参观圣保罗教堂。

They took part in the birthday party at Tom's. 他们参加了在汤姆家举行的生日聚会。


1) 不以s结尾的复数名词所有格的构成形式与单数名词的相同。

例如: the children's movie 孩子们的电影 the Women's Day妇女节

2) 在以下两个语言点使用的时候,注意其名词的单复数。

例如: Mary and Linda's birthday 玛丽和琳达的生日

Mary's and Linda's birthdays 玛丽的生日和琳达的生日


① ―-'s‖所有格形式多用于表示有生命的名词,或表示与人类活动有关的时间、地点、机构等名词。 例如: Tom's books 汤姆的书 today's newspaper 今天的报纸

② ―of‖所有格主要表示无生命的东西。

例如: the ticket of Chinese Kung Fu show 中国功夫表演的门票

the price of the pants 裤子的价格

③ 表示类别或属性时,只能用―-'s‖所有格形式。

例如: a women's college 女子学院 children's books 儿童读物


a college of the women 那些女人的学院

④ 所有格中的名词后面有定语(如现在分词短语或介词短语等),只能用―of‖所有格形式。

例如: It is the violin of the boy speaking to the teacher. 这是正同老师说话的那个男生的小提琴。 He is a student of Fifth Middle School in Xi'an. 他是西安第五中学的学生。

⑤ 当所有格中的名词是以定冠词加形容词的形式出现时,只能用 of 构成的所有格形式。例如: the happiness of the old老年人的幸福the problems of the young年轻人的问题 【7】代词 (1). 含义

代词是为了避免重复而用来代替名词的词,大多数代词具有名词和形容词的作用。 (2). 人称代词

1) 表示―我‖、―你‖、―他(她、它)‖、―我们‖、―你们‖、―他们‖的词叫做人称代词。

① 人称代词的主格在句子中作主语。例如: He comes from Brazil.

② 人称代词的宾格在句子中作宾语。例如:Let her play the piano for you. 注:

1) 当几个代词同时作主语时,其顺序一般是:

单数:you, he and I 复数:we, you and they. 例如: You, he and I are in the same school now. We, you and they must come here on time.

2).表示国家、大地、船只、月亮等名词常用she来替代(sun则常用he)。 例如: China is my motherland. She isn‘t what she used to be. (3). 物主代词

1) 表示所有关系的代词叫物主代词。物主代词包括形容词性的物主代词和名词性的物主代词。 2) 变化形式 ① 形容词性的物主代词在句中作定语。 例如:Today is his birthday.

② 名词性的物主代词常用来避免前面已提及的名词,在句中作主语、表语、宾语。 例如:This is your backpack, mine is on the floor under the bed. 高分突破:


例如: A friend of mine came to see me yesterday. 人称代词和物主代词专项练习

( )1. She is a student, _____ name is Julia. A. its B. her C. hers D. his ( )2. Could you help _____ with _______ English, please.

A. I, my B. me, me C. me, my D. my, I


( )3. A friend of _____ came here yesterday. A. my B. his C. him D. himself

( )4. ______ pencil-box is beautiful. But ____ is more beautiful than ______.

A. Toms, my, he B. Tom's, mine, his C. Tom's, mine, him D. Tom's, my, his

( )5. Most of ______like Chinese food.A. they B. Their C. Them D. theirs

( )6. Don't you let ____ help you ?

A. I and my friend B. my friend and I C. my friend and me D. my friend and I to

( )7. How hard______ works! A. we B. him C. he D. his

( )8. ______ have been chosen.

A. I, you and he B. He, you and I C. You, he and I D. You,and me

( )9. She gave the erasers to Lucy and _______ .A. I B. me C. my D. mine

( )10. That's not ______, it is_______. I made it ______ .

A. ours, mine, myself B. your, mine, myself C. yours, her, myself D. yours, my, myself ( )11. We bought ___English-Chinese dictionaries. A. us B. ours C. ourselves D. to us

( )12. Most people think ___ are winning SARS. A. ours B. ourselves C. we D. us



1. It‘s not ________ alarm clock. (a)

2. Let __________ play tennis. (I)

3. Where _________ Tom‘s parents?(be)

4. Many ________. That‘s all right.(thank)

5. I see your _________ . They are fine.(grandparent)

6. Your _________ are my pen __________.(朋友)

7. His ____________ are very cute.(女儿)

8. The two ____________ are good. (家庭)

9. ___________ answers are right.(they)

10. Her sister and his brother aren‘t my ________ (表兄妹)


1. A: Hi! B: ______. A: What's your name? B: ______________________________.

A: _______________________________________? B: 535-2875. A: Thank you. B: Not at all.

2. A: Come and meet my family. B: OK. A: This is my grandfather. B: _________________________? C: How do you do? A: This is my sister Jane. B: Hi, Jane!_____________________________________. D: Hi, Dave! Nice to meet you, too.

3. A: Jeff, is this your watch? B: Oh, no, _________________. It's Mr King's watch.

A: Mr King, is this your watch? C: Oh, yes, ____________. Thank you. A: Not at all.

4. A: Tony. Is that your key? B: No. ________key is here. That's ________ my key. It's ________ key. A: Whose? Mark's? B: Yes.


A: Excuse__1__, is__2__your pencil? B: Yes, it is. A: __3__ you are.

B: __4__ is your pencil case? A: It's __5__ the desk. It's __6__ to __7__ dictionary. __8__ new. B: Oh, __9__ very nice. A: Can I __10__ a look at your pencil case?

B: Yes, of course. A: Thanks.

1. ____________ 2. ___________ 3. ___________ 4. __________ 5. __________

6. ____________ 7. ___________ 8. ___________ 9. __________ 10. _________


Look! This is a picture of my family. My mother is a doctor. My father is a teacher. This is my brother. His name is Harry. He's twelve. He's a student. That is my grandmother. Ah, this is me. My name is May. I'm ten. I'm a student. Harry and I are in the same school.


( )1. This is a picture of my family.

( )2. My mother is a teacher.

( )3. Harry is my brother.

( )4. Harry is twenty.

( )5. Harry and I are in the same school.



【1】Where is/are…?……在哪里?


Where is Lucy's coat(可数名词单数)?Lucy的大衣在哪里?

Where are the balls(可数名词复数)?球在哪里?

Where is the coke(不可数名词)?可乐在哪里?

【2】Please take these things to your brother. 请将这些东西带给你弟弟。


Please stand up请起立。 Sit down, please. 请坐下。

(2)take…to…译为―把……带/拿到……‖。take是动词,译为―拿走,带去‖, to…是介词,表示方向。如:

Please take the broom to the door. 请把这扫帚带到门边去。

Take this photo to Li Lei. 把这张照片带给李雷。

【3】Can you bring some things to school?你能将一些东西拿到学校来吗?

(1)can为情态动词,后面接动词原形。Can you…?(你能……吗?)是一种客气、礼貌地征询对方许可的句型。如:Can I have a look at your picture?我可以看一下你的照片吗?


Would you like some fish?你想吃鱼吗? Can you give me some apples?你能给我些苹果吗?



1.There isn‘t______________milk in the fridge.

2.I can see______________cars,but I can‘t see_______________buses.

3.He has_________________friends in England.

4.Were there________________trees on the farm?

5.Would you like______________tea?No,I‘d not like_____________tea,but I‘d l...

take 和bring的练习题 :

1.Can you______________the hat to me when you come?

2.Please______________these things to your brother.3.I often_____________my baby brother to the park.

【4】There are pictures on the wall. 墙上挂着画。

There be 句型

1)构成及意义 There be + n. + some place. 在某处有什么。

例如:There is an alarm clock on the dresser. There are some keys in the drawer.

2) 否定式

There be + not + a/an +n. + some place. There be + not + any + n.(pl.) + some place.

There be + no + n. + some place.

例如:There isn‘t a baseball on the floor. There aren‘t any books in the bookcase.

3) 特殊情况

There +will ( be going to ) + be + a/an +n. + some place.

There be + 名词+ doing sth. 某地存在正在做某事的某物。

There will be a meeting in the afternoon. 下午有一个会。

There are some people playing in the park. 公园里有些正在玩耍的人。

注:1)There be句型的就近原则:若有两个或两个以上的主语是,谓语常与靠近它的那个主语一致。 例如:There is a book, two pens and some cups on the table.

There are two pens, some cups and a book on the table.

2)与have的区别在于:have表示某人或某物拥有什么;而There be表示在什么地方存在什么。

【5】I have a baseball. It's on the floor, between the bookcase and the desk. 我有一只棒球,棒球在书架与书桌之间的地板上。

between…and…意思是―在……和……中间‖,如:I sit between Lily and Lucy. 我坐在莉莉和露茜之间。 I can come here between seven and eight. 我七点钟和八点钟之间能来。



The woman between her and me is our English teacher. 在我和她之间的女士是我们的英语老师。 【课堂作业】 一、 单项选择:

( )1.Is your photo in the drawer? ____.

A.Yes, I am B.No,it is C.Yes,it is D.No,I‘m not ( )2.---________ my baseball? ---It‘s under the chair.

A.Where B.Where‘s C.Where‘re D.Where are ( )3.---________ under the tree? ---No,they aren‘t.

A.Where are B.What is C.Are they D.Is it

( )4.I need some things_________ class this afternoon. A. in B. at C. of D. for ( )5.There ________ a computer on the desk. A.are B.have C.has D.is ( )6.A notebook and an eraser _____ in the pencil case. A. are B. is C. am D. have ( )7.I need to take the video tape back ___ the store after school. A. for B. of C. at D. to ( )8. Look at those ________. They are _______.

A. photoes; hers B. photos; his C. photo; her D. photoes; mine ( )9. --- ______ behind ______? --- My alarm clock.

A. What‘s; the chair B. Where‘s; the chair C. What are; the chair D. Where are; a chair ( )10. Look. This is ____ clock. It‘s ___ alarm clock. A. a; an B. an; an C. an; a D. a; a ( )11. Please ________ this key to your sister. She is at school.

A. bring B. brings C. take D. to take ( )12. Sally. I need my dictionary. Can you ___________?

A. bring me it B. take me it C. bring it to me D. take it to me ( )13. My computer game is ______ the drawer and my books are _______ the sofa.

A. on; on B. in; in C. on; in D. in; on ( )14. Look. This is a picture _____ my bedroom. ________ bedroom is clean.

A. of; A B. of; The C. for; A D. for; The

( )15. _______ my toys. They are new. A. Here are B. Here is C. This is D. That is 二、完形填空:

This is my bedroom. It‘s a nice. The door . And a ball is is near the window. You can see athe desk. You

( A )

This is a room in Kate‘s house. There is a big bed, a table, a computer and some chairs in it. There‘s a glass and some books on the table. There is a picture on the wall. Kate is in the room. She is looking at the picture. Her father and mother are in the school. They work hard. ( )1.Is there only one room in Kate‘s house?

A.Yes, there is. B.There is a bed. C.There is a computer. D.I don‘t know. 9

( )2.What‘s in the room? A.Only a bed. B.Only a table. C.Only some chairs. D.A bed, a table, a computer and some chairs.

( )3.Is there anything on the table?

A.Yes, there is. B.No, there isn‘t. C.Some books. D.A glass.

( )4.Who is at home? A.Kate‘s father. B.Kate‘s mother. C.Kate s brother. D.Kate.

( )5.Kate‘s father and mother are ________.

A.teachers B.students C.friends D.at home

( B )

My name is Fett. I‘m English. But now I live (住) in China. I am a student. This is my classroom. Fifteen small desks and thirty chairs are in the classroom. They are for (给) classmates (同班同学) and me. A big desk is in the classroom, too. It‘s for my teacher. A clock is on the back (后面)wall of the classroom. Next to the clock is a map. It‘s a map of China.

( )6. Who is Jeff?

A. A schoolboy. B. A schoolgirl. C. A Chinese student D. American.

( )7. What is Jeff talking about?

A. The family. B. The school. C. The classroom. D. The park.

( )8. What‘s on the back wall of the classroom?

A. A clock. B. A map. C. A map and a clock. D. A picture.

( 有) in the classroom?

A. Fifteen. B. Sixteen. C. Thirty. D. Thirty-one.

( )10. What does the underlined (划线) ―it‖ mean (意思) in the passage (文章)?

A. The classroom. B. The map of China. C. The big desk. D. The school

A: Is my computer game on the table? B: No, it isn‘t. It‘s on the bookcase.

( Are they on the bookcase, too?

( )B: A: Oh. So, where is my pencil case?

( )B: A: And where‘s my backpack?

B: It‘s under the table. And your baseball is under the chair.

A: Oh, OK. And where are Mom‘s keys? ( )B: 五、 根据括号内的汉语和首字母写出英语单词,使句子通顺: 5%

1. We have a new (梳妆台) ___________________.

2. I put my books on the (书橱) __________________.

3. The (植物) ______________ is near the window.

4. Can you (拿来) ______________ me a pencil?

5. This is a (相片) ______________ of my family.

6. ---W___________ is my clock, do you know? ---It‘s on the desk.

7. The v__________ tape is on the table.

8. Your brother needs the dictionary. Can you t__________ it to him?

9. I have a small r________, but it‘s very nice.

10. My keys are in the d______________. You can‘t see.





I have a sister . 我有一个妹妹。

Jack has an apple . Jack 有一个苹果。(这里has是have的第三人称单数形式。)

They have no computers. 他们没有计算机。


I‘d like to have a cup of tea . 我想要喝一杯茶。

We usually have lunch at 12:00 . 我们通常12点吃午餐。


She doesn‘t have bread in the morning .她早上不吃面包。

【2】 Let’s play basketball . 让我们一起打篮球吧。Let‘s ……,是祈使句的一种,意思是―让我们……‖ let sb do sth 让某人做某事 (sb代表人,如果是代词用宾格,do代表动词原形)

例如: Let‘s say good - bye here .我们在此再见吧。 Let‘s try again . 让我再试一次。

Let‘s go and play volleyball . 让我们一块去打排球吧。

【3】That sounds good . 那听起来不错。


a. The music sounds sweet . 这音乐听起来多悦耳。

b. His speech sounds interesting . 他的演讲听起来很有趣。

这里good , sweet , interesting都是形容词。这儿提醒大家sound作―听起来‖讲时,是连系动词,后接形容词。

【4】 boring adj. 让人烦的

It‘s a boring evening .这是一个百无聊赖的晚上。It‘s boring to listen to him .听他讲话,烦死了。

【5】(1)Let’s play volleyball .

play意为―打球‖。 play+球类 表示―踢,打,玩......‖ play football play+the+乐器 表示―弹奏……乐器‖ play the piano play volleyball 打排球。 play tennis打网球

(2)She plays sports every day . play sports做运动。

【6】Learn some more words for sports .

rugby (橄榄球),American football (美式足球), golf(高尔夫),hockey(曲根球),


learn sth. 学习……, 例如: We will learn physics this term.

learn sth. from … 从…学到……, 例如: We learnt cooking from my cousin.

learn from 向……学习, 例如: Let us learn from Lei Feng.

learn to do sth.学做,例如:Lucy learnt to play the trumpet last summer vacation.

learn + 疑问代词 + to do sth. 例如: We are learning how to mend this bike.

You should learn what to say when you meet the foreigners at the airport.


两个词语都有这一用法:learn sth. / study sth.。

但指学习时,study有―深入研究‖的含义;而且study不能用作:study to do sth.。

【7】We have many clubs: volleyball, basketball, ping - pong and more.


I have had two apples . I want more .我已经吃了两个苹果了。我想要再来几个。

【8】You want to join your school sports center.你想加入你学校的体育中心。

want 想,想要

1) want + sth./sb. ―想要……‖ 例如:I want two hamburgers.

2) want to do sth. ―想要做……‖ 例如:He wants to join the reading club.

3) want sb. (not) to do sth. ―想某人(不)做什么‖ 例如:

My mother wants me to practice English every day.

He wants that boy not to play soccer in the street.

【9】 Welcome to our sports center. 欢迎到我们体育中心来。


1)作名词:a warm welcome 热烈欢迎

2)作形容词:You‘re welcome. 没关系。

sb. be welcome to some place 欢迎某人到某地 sb. be welcome to do sth. 欢迎某人做什么事

3)作动词:welcome sb. 例如:Let‘s welcome Mr. Smith to give us a talk.

【10】Ed Edgarson has a great sports collection. Ed Edgarson有丰富的体育用品收藏。


apple tree - apple trees toy train - toy trains shoe shop - shoe shops

如果修饰词为man, woman则两个名词都要变为复数形式,例如:

woman doctor - women doctors man teacher - men teachers

注:1) 有的名词常以复数形式出现, 例如:clothes shop - clothes shops sports center - sports centers

2) 丰富的钢笔收藏:a great/big pen collection 少的钢笔收藏: a small pen collection

【11】He only watches them on TV. 他只在电视上观看它们。


1) 看:watch, see, look, read

watch TV/ a movie/ a football game/ a match/ the news reports see a movie/ an old friend look at the picture/ that funny boy read the newspaper/ a map/ the menu/ an interesting story

2) on TV 在电视上

on the phone 在电话里on the computer 在电脑上 on the screen 在屏幕上

【12】 冠词的用法

(1) 二.a和an的区别

不定冠词有a和an两种形式,a用于辅音(指读音)开头的词前,an用于元音(指读音)开头的词前。 例如:a boy,a university,a European country; an hour,an honour,an island,an elephant,an umbrella





d.表示―每一‖,相当于every. 例如,I go to school five days a week.我一周上五天课。

e.用在序数词前,表示―又一‖,―再一‖。例如,I have three books. I want to buy a fourth one.我已经有三本书,我想买第四本。

f.用在某些固定词组中:a lot(of)许多,大量;after a while过一会儿



2.指谈话双方都知道的人或事物。例如:Open the window,please.请打开窗户。

3.指上文已经提到的人或事物。例如:I have a car. The car is red.我有一辆小汽车,它是红色的。

4.指世界上独一无二的事物。 例如:Which is bigger,the sun or the earth?哪一个大,太阳还是地球?

5.用在序数词,形容词最高级前。例如:The first lesson is the easiest one in this book.第一课是这本书最简单的一课。

6.用在由普通名词构成的专有名词前。例如,the Great Wall 长城,the United States美国

7.用在某些形容词前,表示某一类人。例如:the poor穷人,the blind盲人

8用在姓氏复数形式前,表示―全家人‖或―夫妻俩‖。例如:the Greens 格林一家或格林夫妻俩

9.用在方位词前。例如:on the left在左边,in the middle of在中间

10.用在乐器名称前。例如:She plays the piano every day.她每天弹钢琴。


例如:the Black Sea黑海,the Yangzi River长江

12.用在某些固定词组中:all the same仍然;all the time一直;at the moment此刻;at the same time同时;by the way顺便说;do the shopping/washing买东西/洗衣服;in the morning/afternoon/evening 在上午/下午/晚上;in the open air 在户外,在野外


1.在专有名词和不可数名词前。例如,Class Two二班,Tian‘an Men Square天安门广场,water水


例如my book(正);my the book(误)


例如,They are teachers.他们是老师。

Tigers like meat.老虎喜欢吃肉

4.在星期,月份,季节,节日前。例如:on Sunday在周日,in March在三月,in spring在春天,on Women‘s Day在妇女节

(特例:如果月份,季节等被一个限定性定语修饰时,则要加定冠词:He joined the Army in the spring of 1982.他在1982年春季参军。)


6.在学科名称,三餐饭和球类运动名称前。例如:I have lunch at school every day.

特例:当football,basketball指具体的某个球时,其前可以用冠词:I can see a football.我可以看到一只足球。Where‘s the football?那只足球在哪儿?(指足球,并非―球类运动‖)

7.在表特定的公园,街道,车站,桥,学校等之前。例如:No.25 Middle School


(1)与by连用的交通工具名称前:by bus乘公共汽车;by car乘汽车;by bike骑/坐自行车;by train乘火车;by 12

air/plane乘飞机;by sea/ship乘船,但take a bus,in a boat,on the bike前需用冠词

(2)名词词组:day and night日日夜夜;brother and sister兄弟姐妹;hour after hour时时刻刻;here and there到处

(3)介词词组:at home在家;in surprise惊奇地;at noon在中午;on foot步行;at night在晚上;on duty值日;at work在工作;on time准时;for example例如;in class在上课;on show展览;in bed在床上

(4)go短语:go home回家;go to bed上床睡觉;go to school去上学;go to work去上班;go shopping/swimming/boating/fishing去买东西/游泳/划船/钓鱼


in hospital住院/in the hospital在医院里 go to sea出海/go to the sea去海边

on earth究竟/on the earth在地球上,在世上

in front of在……(外部的)前面/in the front of在……(内部的)前面

take place发生/take the place(of)代替 at table进餐/at the table在桌子旁

by sea乘船/by the sea在海边 in future从今以后,将来/in the future未来

go to school(church…)上学(做礼拜…)/go to the school(church…)到学校(教堂…)去

on horseback骑着马/on the horseback在马背上

two of us我们当中的两人/the two of us我们两人(共计两人)

out of question毫无疑问/out of the question不可能的,办不到的

next year明年/the next year 第二年

a teacher and writer一位教师兼作家(一个人)/a teacher and a writer(两个人) 冠词练习

( )1.There is _____ apple on the desk. A. a B .the C. an D./

( )2.The girl under ____ tree is my sister. A. a B .the C .an D./

( )3.Mary is from _____ USA. A. a B. the C. an D./

( )4.He met _____ friend of his on the road. A. a B .the C .an D./

( )5.Mr Black will go back to England____.

A .by air B .by a plane C. by trains D. at a train

( )6.Yesterday I went to____ work on ___foot. A. /, / B ./, the C .the, / D. the, the

( )7.There is ____―h‖ in the word ―hour‖, but____ ―h‖doesn‘t make a sound.

A. a, a B. a, the C. the, ,an D .an. the

( )8.I‘m going to see my mother. She is ill ____.

A. in hospital B. in the hospital C. in a hospital D. at a hospital

( )9. We have three meals ____day. We have breakfast at 6:30 in ____morning every day.

A. the, the, the B. the, /, the C. a, /, the D .a, the, the

( )10.——This is____ film I‘ve told you about several times.

——It‘s great. I‘ve never seen ___ more moving one. A. a, a B. the, theC. the, a D. a, the

( )11.——Tina,could you please play___ piano for me while I‘m singing?

—With pleasure A .a B. an C. the D. /

( )12.I want to try again. Please give me___ third chance again. A .a B. the C. an D. /

( )13. —What‘s the matter with you? —I caught__ bad cold and had to stay in____ bed.

A. a; / B. a; the C. a; a D. the; the

( )14.____ sun is shining brightly. A. A B. An C. The D. /

( )15. Swimming is__ in summer. A. a great fun B. great fun C. great funs D. great a fun



( )1.Lily and Lucy __ a cat.They like it very much. A.have B.has C.there is D.there are

( )2.—Do you have any empty bags?—___________,I___________.

A.Yes;don' t B.No;don' t have anyC.Yes,have any D.No;have

( )3.—How many pens ___________ Jim ___________?—Three.

A.does;have B.do;haveC.does;has D.do;has

( )4.I don't ____ a dictionary.She _____ one.

A.has;have B.have;have C.have;has D.have;has a

( )5.They don't have ___________ colour pencils,but I have ___________.

A.some;some B.any;someC.some;any D.no;some

( )6.—Is this your bike?—No,it is______._____is red.

A.her;His B.his;Her C.mine;Her D.hers;Mine

( )7.Every day ___________ has a good rest and does his homework after school.


A.TomB.KateC.Tom and Kate D.Tom's sister

( )8.___________ that old woman ___________ a house near the river?

A.Do;has B.Does;haveC.Does;has D.Do;have

( )9.—___________,what's the time? —______,I don't know.I don't have a watch.

A.Excuse me;SorryB.Sorry;Excuse meC.Sorry;Sorry D.Excuse me;Excuse me

( )10.—Who _____ 20 yuan now?—I do.A.have B.hasC.do have D.is have

( )11.—___________you___________any apples?—Yes,I___________.

A.Do;have;doB.Are;have;doC.Are;having;am D.Do;have;am

( )12.—Li Wei,do you have any pencils?—___________! I don't have any.

A.Excuse me B.CertainlyC.OK D.Sorry

( )13.___ _,do you have a pencil?A.Hello B.SorryC.Thank you D.Excuse me

( )14.Kate gives___________ some books,but I must give___________ back soon.

A.I;it B.me;themC.my;they D.me;they

( )15.—Do your friends have any story books?—No,they_____.

A.aren't B.not have C.don't D.can't


1.A:Do you __________ a soccer ball?B:No,I don't.A:What about Billy?B:I think he ___________ one.

2.There are some children in the room.They all ___________ new books.But they don't ___________ any colour pencils.Lei Hao ___________ a big pencil-box.Ren Lijuan ___________ a small one.What about Bai jie? Oh,she ___________ two!


厨房),four bedrooms and three other Mrs.Green.

,and the other (另一个much.The son has five ,nine and many baseballs.He likes playing day.The daughter has eight balls,ten ping-pang balls and seven tinnis balls.She plays ping-pang ball every day.


【1】Do you like bananas? 你喜欢香蕉吗?

1) like v. like sth. / sb. 喜欢

… would like to do sth.想做…

like doing sth. 喜欢做…

like to do sth. 想做… 想要某人做…

like sb. to do sth. 想要某人做…

be like 像…look/sound like 看/听起来像…

注: like doing sth. 喜欢做…(长期的喜好,习惯)


like to do sth. 想做…(短期的,具体的某一次活动) = want to do




What is your father like? 你父亲长得什么样?


3) unlike prep. 不像


不可数名词:直接使用 可数名词: 名词复数 / 冠词+名词单数

【2】Runner eats well. 跑步选手吃得好。

1) 构词法:在动词后面加-er或-or,将动词变为名词,意思是―做……的人‖


clean–cleaner sing-singer paint-painter wait-waiter report-reporter work-worker teach-teacher speak-speaker act-actor visit-visitor


只加-r: dance-dancer write-writer drive-driver

双写尾字母:run-runner swim-swimmer shop-shopper

注:1) cook v.烹调 ― cook n.厨师 - cooker n.厨房用具

2) 跑步明星: running star (√) runner star (×)

【3】Running star Sandra Clark eats lots of healthy food. 长跑明星Sandra Clark吃许多有营养的食品。 lots of=a lot of修饰不可数名词food。a lot of相当于many或much, 既可以修饰可数名词,又可以修饰不可数名词,通常只用在肯定句中。在否定句和疑问句中用many和much。many修饰可数名词复数,much修饰不可数名词。如:There are a lot of flowers in the park.公园里有许多花。

There is a lot of milk in the cup 杯子里有许多牛奶。How many hours are there in a day?一天有多少小时? How much tea do you want?你要多少茶叶?

【4】And for dinner, she has chicken, tomatoes, French fries and, for desset, ice cream. 晚餐她吃鸡肉、西红柿和薯条,甜点是冰淇淋。


—What do you have for breakfast?你们早餐吃什么?We have bread and milk. 我们吃面包和牛奶。

(2)have在此句译为―吃‖,如:have breakfast/lunch/supper。

(3)以o结尾的名词,有生命的加es, 如potatoes(土豆),tomatoes(西红柿)。无生命的加s,常见的有:zoos(动物园),photos(照片),kilos(公斤),radios(收音机)。

(4)and作为并列连词,在此句中连接两个分句,后一分句为使句子简洁省略了前面的she has, 即for dessert, she has ice cream. 。

【5】For breakfast, she likes eggs, bananas and apples.


1) for 就……而言

2) have/eat + 三餐 ―吃早/中/晚饭‖ 例如: I usually have lunch at home.

have/eat + a + adj. + 三餐 ―吃怎样的早/中/晚饭‖ 例如:

have a rich/ big/quick/…breakfast 吃了顿丰盛的/迅速的早餐 We had a quick super tonight.


一、定义:一般现在时表示经常或习惯性的动作,也可表示现在的状态或主语具备的性格和能力。 例:(1).表示事物或人物的特征、状态。The sky is blue.天空是蓝色的。

(2).表示经常性或习惯性的动作。I get up at six every day.我每天六点起床。

(3).表示客观现实。The earth goes around the sun.地球绕着太阳转。


1.肯定句: 一般现在时中,没有be动词和情态动词,主语为第三人称单数(she ,he ,it )、单数可数名词、不可数名词的,动词要按规则加上s或es。主语是复数可数名词的肯定句,动词用原形。 例:She(He,It )likes fish. 她(他,它)喜欢鱼。(主语为第三人称单数)

The table has four legs.桌子有四条腿。(主语为单数可数名词)

Water boils at 100 degrees Celsius.水在100度沸腾。(主语为不可数名词)

They go to school every day .他们每天都去上学。(主语是复数可数名词的,动词用原形)2.疑问句:

(1)一般现在时中,句中有be动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)时,一般疑问句将be动词或情态动词放在句首。


a. 把be 动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)提前。


c.句末要加问号。例:肯定句:She is a student . 疑问句:Is she a student ?

肯定句: He can swim. 疑问句:Can he swim? .


Is she a student ? Yes, she is . Can you swim? Yes, I can .

(2) 句中如果没有be动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)时,主语为第三人称单数(she ,he ,it )、单数可数名词、不可数名词的疑问句要用does 来提问。即在句首加does,句子中原有动词用原形

例:—Does he like Chinese? 他喜欢汉语吗? —Yes, he does. 是的,他喜欢(汉语)。

—Does a dog eat meat? 狗吃肉吗? —No, it doesn‘t. 不,它不吃(肉)。

(3) 句中如果没有be动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)时,主语为复数可数名词的疑问句要用do 来提问。


Do you like monkeys? No, we don‘t. Do students study Englsih ? Yes , they do.

3. 否定句:

(1)句中有be动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)时,否定句在be动词和情态动词后加not。如:I am not a teacher. He can not fly .

(2) 句中没有be动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)时,主语为第三人称单数的否定句,在动词原形前加does + not (doesn‘t)。 如:He doesn‘t like cats.

(3)句中没有be动词(am , is , are )或情态动词(may , can , must , should)时,主语为复数可数名词的否定句,在动词原形前加do + not (don‘t)。

They don‘t go to school on Sundays.


1、人称代词he, she, it是第三人称单数。如: He likes watching TV. 他喜欢看电视。

She has lunch at twelve. 她十二点吃午餐。 It looks like a cat. 它看起来像只猫。


①Han Mei looks like her mother. 韩梅看起来像她的母亲。

②Beijing is in China. 北京在中国。

③Uncle Wang often makes cakes. 王叔叔经常做蛋糕。

3、单数可数名词或"this / that / the+单数可数名词"作主语时,是第三人称单数。如:

①A horse is a useful animal. 马是有用的动物。 ②This book is yours. 这本书是你的。

③That car is red. 那辆小汽车是红色的。 ④The cat is Lucy's. 这只猫是露茜的。

4、不定代词someone, somebody, nobody, everything, something等及指示代词this, that作主语时,是第三人称单数。如: ①Everyone is here. 大家到齐了。

②There is something wrong with the watch. 这块手表有毛病。③This is a pen. 这是一支钢笔。 ④That is an eraser. 那是一块橡皮擦。


①The milk is in the glass. 牛奶在玻璃杯里。 ②The bread is very small. 那面包很小。


①"6" is a lucky number. "6"是个吉利数字。 ②"I" is a letter. "I"是个字母。


1.一般情况下,直接加-s,如:cook-cooks, milk-milks

2.以s. x. sh. ch. o结尾,加-es,如:guess-guesses, wash-washes, watch-watches, go-goes

3.以―辅音字母+y‖结尾,变y为i, 再加-es,如:study-studies



( )1.Tom likes eggs ,oranges and bananas ___ breakfast. A. in B. of C. for D. on

( )2. There are _____ fruits on the table. A. lots of B. lot of C. a lot D. lots for

( )3. For __ lunch , she has some hamburgers. A. a B. an C. the D. /

( )4. Bill likes bananas, he likes __, too.

A. strawberry B. strawberries C. strawberrys D. strawberres

( )5. This is my sister , ______name is lily. A. she B. she is C. Her D. her

( )6..—Let‘s have oranges. — ________.

A.That‘s sound good B.That sound good C.That‘s sounds good D.That sounds good

( )7. I ____ a book in my backpack. A. there are B. have C. there is D. has

( )8. He is _____ student ______Class 4. A. the , in B. a , of C. a , in D. an , on

( )9. That is ___ room.

A. Lily and Lucy B. Lily and Lucy‘s C. Lily‘s and Lucy‘s D. Lily‘s and Lucy

( )10. ---Do you know the girl in the hat? ---______.

A. Yes, I am. B. Yes , she is. C. Yes, I know. D. Yes , I do.

( )11.Let‘s _________. A. go home B. to go to home C. go to home D. to go home

( )12. ______ like French fries. A. He and I B. I and he C. He and me D. I and him

( )13. The boy ______ hamburgers very much. So he eats a lot.

A. like B. likes C. don‘t like D. doesn‘t like

( )14.— Does your son like carrots? — ________.

A.Yes, she does B.Yes, he is C.No, he doesn‘t D.No, she doesn‘t

( )15.He has ____ egg and ____ hamburger. A.an, an B.a, a C.an, a D.a, an


( )16.There is a ________ shop. It sells bananas, apples, pears and oranges.

A.vegetable B.food C.fruit D.drink

( )17.What ____ she have ____ dinner? A.do, in B.does, for C.is, at D.can, to

( )18.There is some ___ on the table. A.tomato B.egg C.chicken D.banana

( )19.There ________ lots of apples on the tree. A.be B.am C.is D.are

( )20.We need lots of ____every day.

A.healthy food B.salads C.milks D.vegetable

( )21.— Do you like French fries? — ________.

A.Yes, I do B.Yes, I don‘t C.I like them very much D.I don‘t like them

( )22.____ your mother ___ carrots? A.Do; eat B.Is; eat C.Does; eat D.Are; eat

( )23.Our friend ___like salad. A.don‘t B.doesn‘t C.isn‘t D.aren‘t

( )24.— Do they like hamburgers? — Yes, they like ________ very much.

A.it B.them C.their D.its

( )25.My sister likes English ____. A.a lot of B.lot C.lots of D.a lot

( )26.Her parents __lunch at home. A.doesn‘t haveB.haven‘t C.hasn‘t D.don‘t have

( )27.We have lots of food ________ dinner. A.in B.at C.for D.on

( )28.___ does Lucy like? Tomatoes. A.How B.What C.Where D.Why

( )29.Aunt Li likes ____ bananas. A.eat B.eating C.eats D.eatting

( )30.Ask and answer the question about ________.

A.what he like B.what he likes C.what does he like D.what do he likes


1.tomato ____________ 2. French fry________ 3.strawberry______________

4.apple _____________ 5.star__________________ 6.family _________________

7.tooth_____________ 8.foot _________________ 9.potato _________________

10.bus______________ 11.boy_________________ 12.Chinese________________

13.brush____________ 14.dictionary____________ 15.key___________________

16.watch____________ 17.class________________ 18.month__________________

Starter Unit 1 ~ Review of Units 1~6【作业练习】


( )1. Her ____ name is Kate. A. last B. first C. second D. family

( )2. This apple is green. His family name is __, too. A. Red B. Black C. green D. Green

( )3. The boy ____ blue ____ Tom. A. in, is B. is, in C. are, on D. of, are

( )4. My orange is ______ .A. a orange B. orange C. a green D. oranges

( )5. What‘s in the lost and found case? _________.

A. Set of keys B. A set of key C. A set of keies D. A set of keys

( )6. Who‘s that? __________.

A. That‘s a waitress.B. This is a girl.C. This is Ms Wang.D. That‘s Mrs Wang.

( )7. Your uncle is your father‘s______.A. sister B. cousin C. friends D. father

( )8. Can I see your ID card? ______.A. OK B. Can you C. Good D. You see

( )9. Would you please ____ me a pen?A. take B. bring C. know D. let

( )10. ― Are the things in this shop dear?‖― No, they are ______.‖

A. good B. $ 12 C. low price D. cheap

( )11. ― ________, that‘s a car.‖ ― Where? I can‘t _____ it.‖

A. Look, look B. Look, see C. Look at, see D. See, look at

( )12. __ a cute dog. But I don‘t know __ name. A. It‘s, its B. Its, it‘s C. It‘s, it‘s D. Its, its

( )13. What does he ___ __ dinner?A. has, for B. has, at C. have, in D. have, for

( )14. ___ salad do you eat? A. How many B. What many C. How much D. What much

( )15. Does your sister ____ books every day? A. watch B. see C. reads D. read

( )16. I buy these watches ___ them ___ $ 12. A. to, at B. from, for C. to, for D. from, at

( )17. Sam is _ years old. He‘s a good boy. A. forteen B. fourten C. forty D. fourteen

( )18. Let‘s sing a song for him. ____

A. That‘s all right. B. That‘s right. C. All right. D. Right.

( )19. Jerry isn‘t __. He‘s ___. A. an English, American B. English boy, American

C. English, American

D. English, a American


( )20. I‘m sorry I‘m late. ________.

A. That‘s right. B. That‘s all right. C. You‘re welcome. D. That‘s ok.

二. 翻译填空

1. 你的名字是Peter吗?是的。 ______ your name Peter? Yes, _____ _____.

2. 那只丢失的手表是新的。 That ______ ______ is new.

3. 她的叔叔是她妈妈的弟弟。 Her _______ is her _______ ________.

4. 看!我的录像带在地板上椅子底下。

Look! My _______ _______ is _______ the floor _______ the chair.

5. 你喜欢体育吗?欢迎加入我们学校体育中心。

______ you like ______? ______ to _______ our _______ _______ _______.

6. 这场足球比赛真的很无聊。The _________ game is ______ ______ _______.

7. 我阿姨喜欢沙拉但她不喜欢花椰菜。

My aunt _______ _______ but she ______ ______ _______

8. 跑步明星Tony午餐常吃牛奶和汉堡.

______ _______, Tony, often _____ milk and ______ _______ lunch.


At school I have a good friend. He is an English boy .His name is Tom .He is twelve. We

are in No. 3 Middle School(中学) .We‘re not in the same(同一个) class .He is in Class

2,Grade(年级) 1 .Tom‘s sister(妹妹) is not a student .Her name is Jane .She is five .She is a

nice girl .

Miss Gao is my English teacher .She is thirty(30岁) .Mr Wang is Tom‘s Chinese(语文)

teacher .He is thirty ,too .They‘re good teachers .


( )1. Tom is _________. A. English B. American C. Chinese

( )2. Tom is in _____________.

A. Class four ,Grade Two B. Class Tow ,Grade One C. Class four ,Grade One

( )3. How old is Jane? A. four B. five C. twelve

( )4. Miss Gao is my ______teacher . A. English B. Chinese C. math

( )5. Tom and I ___in the same class ,we ____ in the same school .

A. are ;are‘t B. are ; are C. aren‘t ;are


【1】How much are these pants? 这裤子多少钱?

对价格提问:How much …? How much … cost? What‘s the price of …?

例如: How much is this sweater?= How much does this sweater cost?= What‘s the price of this sweater?

【2】You name it, we have it at a very good price.只要你说得出来,我们这里都有并以优惠的价格出售。 以怎样的价格: at a ... price 以优惠的/高的/低廉的价格: at a good/ high/ low price

我以优廉的价格买了一双鞋.I buy a pair of shoes at a good price.

这件毛衣正在以高价出售.This sweater is on sale at a high price.

注:price和high、good、low等词搭配使用。 things(东西)和expensive、dear、cheap等词搭配使用。 例如:The price of this coat is high. = This coat is expensive.

The price of my trousers is low. = My trousers are cheap.

容易犯的错:The price of these pants is expensive. My glasses are low (price).

【3】We have T-shirts in red, green and black. 我们出售红色,绿色和黑色的T恤衫。

同义句:We have red T-shirts, green T-shirts and white T-shirts.

n.+ in + 颜色 = 颜色+n. 例如:She has a new orange jacket. = She has a new jacket in orange.

n. + in all colors 各种颜色的…… 例如:各种颜色的毛衣: the sweaters in all colors

各种颜色的水: the water in all colors

注:在n. + in all colors这个短语中,若中心词是可数名词则应用复数形式。

例如:各种颜色的帽子:the caps in all colors (√) the cap in all colors (×)

【4】We have black and blue hats for $15. 我们以15美元出售黑蓝色的帽子。

1) 同义句:We sell black and blue hats at the price of $15.

for + money = at the price of + money 以……(具体的)价格


2)buy sth. for + money 以…(具体的)价格买了什么 buy sth. for + sb. 给某人买了什么 例如:I bought a pair of red socks for $3. bought a pair of red socks for my daughter.

【5】Huaxing Clothing Store Sale1! 华兴服装店大减价!

1) sale n. 出售 2) great sale 大减价at great sale 在大减价期间,例如:

come and buy some clothes for you at great sale.

3) on sale 正在出售,例如:Look! The cute toy bears are on sale!

4) for sale 待售, 例如:This house is for sale!

注:sell v. 卖Is that book on sale in you store? = Do you sell that book? sell sth. to sb. 把什么卖给某人

【6】We have great bags for only $18.我们有一种大包仅售18元。have sh. for +价格 有….仅售….



( )1.Where ___ your new pants? __ on the bed.

A.is, It‘s B.are, They are C.is, They‘re D.are, It‘s

( )2.What color ________ the socks? A.can B.do C.are D.is

( )3.The girl ___ a colorful pencil. A.there is B.there are C.have D.has

( )4.It‘s that time ________ year again. A.for B.of C.for a D.of a

( )5.You want it, we have it, ____ a very good price. A.for B.at C.of D.in ( )6.We have sweaters _____ all colors ____ ¥50 each.

A.in, at B.at, in C.in, in D.at, at

( )7.Come down ____ Huaxing and see ____ yourself.

A.to, to B.for, for C.to, for D.for, to

( )8.We can ___ books ___ the bookstore (书店).

A.sell, to B.buy, from C.sell, from D.buy, to

( )9.The store ___school things ___ the students.

A.sell, to B.buy, from C.sells, to D.buys, from

( )10.There ____ many shorts ____ sale in the store.

A.are, on B.are, for C.is, on D.is, for

( )11.________ the pants? They‘re 15 yuan.

A.How many is B.How many are C.How much is D.How much are

( )12.We read $ 10as ________.

A.ten dollar B.ten dollars C.dollar ten D.dollars ten

( )13.This shirt is very cheap. I‘ll ____ it. A.bring B.take C.want D.believe

( )14.________ a clerk work in a store? A.Is B.Are C.Does D.Do

( )15.We have T-shirts ____ green for only $ 8. A.at B.in C.on D.with



the bird is in the cage. She can‘t catch it. So she is very angry.

, .

Come to Parkson store. Here is a supermarket(超市) 19

like oranges? They are ¥ 3 a kilo(公斤) strawberries at ¥5 a kilo? And tomatoes are just ¥ center. Do you have a football or a basketball? They are all only ¥ 50 each. And the sports shoes in all colours are ¥ 65 a pair! It‘s so c 5 ! Do you believe it? Come on soon!

1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________


One Sunday afternoon Mr Green and his child, Mary, are in a big shop. Mr Green likes Mary and wants to buy a new dress for her. Mary doesn‘t like the new dress. She likes something to eat. So her father buys two kilos of apples for her, too. Mary also wants to buy some picture-books and coloured pencils. There are many things and many people in the shop. They are men and women, old and young. They all want to buy something there. The people in the shop are very frendly.

( )1.It is ________.A.Saturday B.Monday C.Friday D.Sunday

( )2.Mary and ________ are in the shop.

A.Mrs Green B.his father C.her father D.her mother

( )3.Mary likes to buy ________.A.a new dress B.coloured books C.apples, picture-books and coloured pencils D.something to drink


Sam likes eating fish very much. He often buys fish in the shop and takes them home. One day his wife sees the fish and thinks, ―Good! Now, I can ask my friends to have lunch and we can eat the fish. They like fish very much. ‖

When Sam comes home from work in the evening, the fish is not there and his wife says, ―Oh, your cat eats it. ‖And then she gives him some bread for his supper. Sam is angry(生气). He takes the cat and his wife to a shop near his house and weighs(称)the cat. Then he turns to his wife and says, ―My fish weighs one kilo. The cat weighs one kilo, too. My cat is here, you see, then, where is my fish? ‖

1.What does Sam like eating very much? ________________________

2.Who eat the fish that day? ________________________

3.How much does the fish weigh? ________________________

4.What does Sam‘s wife give him for supper? ________________________

5.Can you guess if (是否)Sam knows where the fish is? __________________________



Welcome to Fenghua Clothing Sale. These T-shirts are just $ 5 each ...






【1】 I was born in 1992. 我生于1992年。

on, in, at与时间状语连用:

1) on + 具体某一天 / 具体某一天的早、中、晚 / 怎样的早、中、晚

例如: on a day on Sunday on January 2nd on the morning of October 1st on Monday evening on a spring afternoon on a warm morning

2)in + 时间段

例如: in the morning / afternoon / evening in a year/ season/ month/ April/ week

1) at + 几点, 固定用法 例如: at 8:00 at noon/ night at this time of year at present

注意:如果时间状语前面有这些词:this, that, next, last, tomorrow, yesterday, every等,则不用介词。 例如: See you next term. Did you have a good time last week?

【2】 How old are you? I’m fifteen. 你多大了?我十五岁。

对年龄的提问:How old are you? What‘s your age?

May I know/have your age? 其回答:I‘m ... (years old).



1) 表达年龄的几个同义句:

Tom is 15.=Tom is 15 years old.=Tom is a 15-year-old boy.=Tom is a boy of 15.

2) num.-year-old通常只用作定语,其中year用名词单数形式,类似的用法有:

a 1000-word article an exciting 5-day trip

当数字是8,18,80,800,11等时,注意不定冠词的使用,例如:an 8-year-old boy an 11-dollar hat

【3】 序数词

(1)特殊词的变化:first , 1st , Second , 2nd ; third , 3rd twenty-first 21st , twenty-second 22nd , twenty-third 23rd.


fourth 4th , fifth 5th , sixth 6th , seventh , 7th , twelfth 12th , nineteenth 19th.


twentieth 20th , thirtieth 30th , fortieth 40th


(1)-When is your birthday ? 你的生日是什么时候?-It‘s November 11th . 我的生日是十一月十一日。

(2)-When is Sarah‘s birthday ? 萨拉的生日是什么时候?-Sarah‘s birthday is January 21st.她的生日是一月二十一日。

(3)-How old are you ? 你多大了?-I‘m thirteen . 我十三岁。(4)-Which year were you born ? 你哪一年出生的?-I was born in 1989. 我1989年出生的。

(5)When is the school trip ? 学校什么时候郊游?-It‘s in October . 十月份郊游。


For example :

-When were you born ? 你什么时候生的?

-I was born on September 3rd , 1989. 我是1989年9月3日生的。

-So you are 11 years and 2 months old.那么你有11岁零两个月大



( )1.When is your birthday? It‘s __.A.February B.second C.February second D.1990 ( )2.____ shirt is white. A.My brother B.My brothers C.My brother‘s D.My brothers‘ ( )3.Do you have a pop concert? Yes, ____. A.we have B.we do C.we are D.I am

( )4.Where‘s ___? A.Tom‘s pants B.Tom‘s pen‘s C.Tom‘s pen D.pen of Tom

( )5.____is your mother? She‘s forty.A.How old B.How C.How age D.What age

( )6.What‘s the month between July and September? ________.

A.June B.August C.October D.November

( )7.________ is very difficult.

A.Lesson fifth B.The lesson fifth C.Fire lesson D.The fifth lesson

( )8.Our school has a sports meeting ____October 15th. A.at B.on C.in D.for ( )9.There are ________ months in a year. The ________ month is December.

A.twelve, twelve B.twelfth, twelfth C.twelve, twelfth D.twelfth, twelve

( )10.What‘s the ____ today? It‘s October twelfth. What ___ is it today? It‘s Sunday.

A.date, day B.day, date C.date, date D.day, day

( )11.________ Day is on June first and ________ Day is on September tenth.

A.Children‘s, Teacher‘s B.Children‘s, Teachers‘

C.Childrens‘, Teacher‘ D.Children‘, Teachers‘

( )12.Mrs Green is ________ mother.

A.Jim and Kate B.Jim‘s and Kate‘s C.Jim and Kate‘s D.Jim‘s and Kate

( )13.The baby is only ________.

A.ten months old B.ten monthes old C.ten month old D.ten old months

( )14.Where ________ you born? I ________ born in Wuhan.

A.was, were B.were, was C.were, were D.was, was

( )15.When ________ you have a school trip? Sorry, I ________ know.

A.are, don‘t B.do, aren‘t C.are, aren‘t D.do, don‘t


B: Sorry, I don‘t have one.

A: So I must go to the shop near our school. B: I think the shop is closed at this time of day.


? B: It‘s Friday. On Friday the shop closes early.

B: Look, it says ―closed‖.

A: Oh, dear! you‘re right. It is closed.?

A: OK, Let‘s go.

1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________



. He wants to see his friends. He wants to meet his new (铃声响了)the classroom.

The Spring Festival is the Chinese New Year‘s D. Everyone in China l and some other delicious food. Li Lei likes New Year‘s cakes, but Lanlan says jiaozi is nicer than New Year‘s

people eat the New Year‘s cakes and jiaozi in their houses. How hthey are!

1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________ 6.________ 7.________




Nancy is an English school girl. She studies in a middle school. She has a little brother. His name is John. John is only four. Nancy likes him very much.

Today is Sunday. Nancy wants to do her homework. She takes out her pencil-box and opens it. ―Oh, dear! where‘s my pen? ―She can‘t find her pen. She goes to ask her brother in his bedroom.

―John! I can‘t find my pen. Can you see. . . Oh, what are you doing with my pen? ‖

―I‘m writing to my friend, Peter. ― John answers.

―But how can you? You don‘t know how to write! ‖

―It doesn‘t matter. Peter can‘t read. ‖ John says.

( )1.How old is Nancy‘s brother? A.Five B.Four C.Six D.Three

( )2.________ can‘t find her pen. A.Nancy B.Peter C.John D.Friend

( )3.Where‘s John?

A.In the school.B.In a shop. C.In his bedroom. D.In her father‘s car.

( )4.Which is not right? A.Nancy finds her pen in John‘s room. B.John can‘t write.

C.John is writing with her sister‘s pen. D.Peter can read.

( )5.John and Peter are ________.A.friends B.English C.at home D.school girls


Jim is ten years old. One day, his friend Tom says to him, ―I am going to have a birthday party on Saturday. Jim, can you come to my party? ‖―I‘ll be glad to, ‖answers Jim. Before Jim goes to the party on Saturday afternoon, his mother says to him, ―Now, Jim, don‘t forget to be polite. Don‘t ask for food until someone gives it to you. ‖ ―All right, Mum, ‖Jim answers, and he goes to Tom‘s house on his new bike. Then Tom‘s mother gives 22

them some food. But she forgets to give Jim any. He waits politely for ten minutes and then he holds his plate up in the air and says loudly, ―Does anyone want a nice and clean plate? ‖

1.Who has a birthday party on Saturday? ________________________________

2.What does Jim‘s mother tell him? ________________________________

3.How does Jim go to Tom‘s home? _________________________________

4.Why does Jim hold up his plate? __________________________________


【1】Do you want to go to a movie? 你想去看电影吗?

看电影的表达形式:go to see/watch a movie go to see/watch movies go to the cinema/ movie house

【2】Young people usually go to movies on weekends.在周末年轻人通常去看电影。

在周末:on/at weekends on/at the weekend

【3】It’s a very successful movie. 这是一部很成功的电影。

1) successful adj.成功的 常用短语:be successful in doing sth. 成功的做了什么

例如:He was successful in playing the trumpet in the concert.

2) n. success v. succeed

【4】 I think it’s exciting. 我认为这非常精彩。

1) 几组易混淆意思的形容词:

excited 感到兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋的 tired 感到疲倦的 tiring 令人疲倦的 bored 感到无聊的 boring 令人无聊的 interested 感兴趣的 interesting 令人感兴趣的 relaxed 感到放松的 relaxing 令人放松的 surprised 感到惊讶的 surprised 令人惊讶的

2) think + 从句

I think I lost my purse on my way home.


I don‘t think I lost my purse on my way home. (√) I think I didn‘t lose my purse on my way home. (×)

【5】Jack likes Michelle Yan best. Jack最喜欢Michelle Yan。

同义句:Jack‘s favorite movie star is Michelle Yan.

like ... best = favorite favorite adj. 最喜欢的 n. 最喜欢的 (可数名词)

例如: This book is my favorite. These books are my favorites.

【6】 He likes her famous movie. 他喜欢她著名的电影。

famous = well-known adj. 著名的

1) be famous for sth. 因为……而出名, 例如:Hollywood is famous for the movies and the movie stars.

2) be famous to sb. 对……来说很出名,例如:Jay Zhou is famous to the young people.

3) be famous as ... 作为……而出名,例如:Michael is famous as a reporter.

4) well-known 众所周知的 widely-known 广为人知的 world-famous 世界闻名的

【7】Jack also likes Beijing Opera. Jack也喜欢京剧。

too, also和either的区别:

1) too用于句末 例如: Tom is from America. Lucy is from America, too.

2) also用于句中(be动词后,行为动词前)例如: Tom is from America. Lucy is also from America.

3) either用于否定句中 例如: Tom isn‘t from America. Lucy isn‘t from America, either.

【8】He often tells me, “Beijing Opera is really fun!”他常对我说:“京剧真的很有趣!”

speak, say, talk, tell

1)speak 强调讲话这一动作本身,演讲或说话的能力、讲某种语言。

It‘s your turn to speak. Can I speak to Mike? I can speak a little English.

2) say 强调说话的内容。Let me say ―Thanks‖ to you. He says he didn‘t know it at all.

3)talk 强调交谈。talk to/with sb. talk about sth./sb.

4) tell 强调―告诉‖。

tell sb. sth. = tell sth. to sb. tell a lie tell the truth tell jokes

注意:say 还有―写着‖的意思, 例如:Look! There is a card. It says ―CLOSED‖. (√)

Look! There is a card. It writes ―CLOSED‖. (×)



( )1.What do you ________ do? A.want B.want to C.like D.to like


( )2.My grandfather ________ stay ________ home and watch TV.

A.like, at B.like, in C.likes to, at D.likes to, in

( )3.________ kind of movies ________ Lucy like?

A.What, does B.What, do C.What‘s, does D.Which, do

( )4.________ a word, we can learn a lot ________ Chinese history.

A.For, for B.In, about C.For, about D.In, for

( )5.Gina likes action movies, ___she doesn‘t like thrillers.

A.and B.so C.or D.but

( )6.September is ________ month of the year.

A.nineth B.ninth C.the nineth D.the ninth

( )7.I don‘t like action movies. I think they‘re ________.

A.boring B.difficult C.interesting D.exciting

( )8.— How is the new movie? — It is ___.

A.well B.thriller C.young D.exciting

( )9.My brother ____ this kind of story-books.

A.have B.don‘t have C.does‘t has D.doesn‘t have

( )10.―The Big Race‖ is a kind of ____.

A.thrillers B.documentaries C.comedies D.action movies

( )11.Do you often go to ________ football games ________ your friends?

A.see, and B.look at, with C.watch, and D.watch, with

( )12.Mr Brown is very old, ____ he is still healthy. A.but B.and C.so D.for

( )13.____ weekdays, what time do you get up? A.On B.For C.At D.By

( )14.Do you like ________ books? A.read B.reading C.see D.seeing

( )15.He even ________ a Beijing Opera artist.

A.want to be B.wants to be C.want is D.is want



There old woman in America. children at all. But she She has black cats and cats. More and more cats come to the old woman‘s house. Soon there arecats. The old woman can‘t feed . ―The children love my cats. ‖she thinks. So she

n. He‘s a great has a movie, Speed. It‘s a very action movie. I think it‘s movie, Sleepless Night. It‘s a thriller. I don‘t it‘s 1.________ 2.________ 3.________ 4.________ 5.________

6.________ 7.________ 8.________ 9.________ 10.________



A.TV play B.Sports C.Around the World D.Talk Show

( )2.The programme of ________ will let you know much about western (西方的) countries.

A.Sisters B.Around China C.Around the World D.On TV Next Week

( )3.If you want to know something about tigers, elephants and monkeys, the best programme for you is __.

A.Around China B.Animal World C.TV play D.Foreign Arts

( )4.English classroom is a programme that ________.

A.lets you know something about classrooms B.tells you something about students

C.lets you know something about school life D.teaches you English

( )5.The programme at the end of Channel 2 means ________ on TV next week.

A.news B.programmes C.people D.places



play + the 琴 play + 球/棋/牌 play with + … 玩……

例如: Can you play the piano? They are playing football now. Do you like playing chess?

Don‘t play with fire. The girl is playing with a yo-yo. She‘s playing with her little dog.

【2】Are you good with children? 你能和孩子们和谐相处吗?

1) be good with = get on well with 与某人和谐相处

2) be good to 对…… 友好= be friendly/kind to…

3) be good for sth. 对……有益= do sth. good= do good to sth.

反义词:be bad for 反义词:be bad to

4) be good at 擅长……= do well in

【3】Can you help kids with swimming? 你能帮助孩子学游泳吗?

help sb. (to) do sth. help sb. with sth. help sb. = give sb. a hand help yourself (进餐时)自己取用 help n. (U)

例如: I really need some help.

helpful adj. 有帮助的,有用的,有益的 helpless adj. 无助的,没用的


1)help作名词时是不可数名词,但有时可在前加a表示―一种‖, 例: It‘s a great help for me.

2)短语help oneself在使用时要注意反身代词的单复数,例如: Jim, help yourself, please.

Help yourselves, boys.

【4】join与 join in 的区别

join 参加,指参加某项活动,join in 加入 着重加入某种组织,团体,政党并成为其中一员。

【5】help sb do sth/help sb with doing sth 帮助某人做某事

【6】be good at=be well in 在……擅长,擅长于

be good for 对…… 有好处 be good with 和……相处的很好

【7】 wanted for…. 为….寻求….show sb. sth.= show sth. to sb.把…给某人看 learn about sth 学习有关于……learn from….向某人学习

【8】Please fill it out. 请把它填好。

动词+副词构成的动词短语,其宾语是名词的时候,可放在动词与副词之间,也可以放在副词的后面,例如: put sth. on = put on sth. take sth. off = take off sth. write sth. down = write down sth. give sth. back = give back sth. work sth. out = work out sth. turn sth. off = turn off sth.


fill sth. out = fill out sth.

但如果宾语是代词it或them则只能放在中间,例如: put it on take them off

注意:get on ―上车‖ get on the bus (√) get on it (√)



( )1.Tom wants ___ to you. Are you free? A.to tell B.tells C.to talk D.talks ( )2.Can you help me ________ my English? A.with B.of C.learning D.about ( )3.Here ________.

A.is some in formations B.are some in formations C.are some information D.is some information ( )4.Bob can play ________ tennis but can‘t play ________ violin.

A.the, the B.×, × C.the, × D.× , the

( )5.Can you paint? ________.A.Yes, a little B.Yes, little C.No, a little D.No, little ( )6.Please call me ________ 8989766. A.in B.at C.about D.with

( )7.________ like to go swimming ________ summer.

A.Children, on B.Children, in C.A child, on D.A child, in

( )8.Miss Read is good ________ music.She can be good ________ children in the music club.

A.at, at B.with, with C.at, with D.with, at

( )9.The young ________ plays the ________ very well.

A.pianist, piano B.piano, pianist C.pianist, pianist D.piano, piano

( )10.What can you do, Lin Tao? ________.

A.I like sports B.I want to join the music club C.I am well D.I can do Chinese Kung Fu

( )11.Hi, can I help you? ________.

A.Yes, please B.No, I can‘t C.Yes, I can D.You are welcome

( )12.________ you can ________ our school concert.

A.Maybe, in B.Maybe, be in C.May be, in D.May be, be in

( )13.We want two good ________ our rock band.

A.music for B.musician in C.music in D.musicians for

( )14.Little Tom can draw ________.His drawings are very ________.

A.good, well B.well, good C.good, good D.well, well

( )15.Can he ________ it in English? A.speak B.speaks C.say D, talk


1.________you dnce? 2.I________ sing. 3.What club does she ________to join?

4.We want to ________ the guitar club. 5.What can you ________ ?


(big hill). a farm not far from their house. Their mother is at home. She is a housewife (家庭主妇). Mike and Ann go to . Mike is in Grade 2. Ann is in Grade 1.

Mike likes sports. He likes swimming and playing football. After school he often plays ( )1.A.brothers and sisters B.brother and sister C.a brother and sister D.a brother and a sister ( )2.A.at B.in C.under D.on

( )3.A.has B.have C.is there D.there is

( )4.A.are working B.is working C.works on D.works at

( )5.A.at the same school B.at the same schools C.in the same school D.in the same schools ( )6.A.in different grades B.in a different grade C.at different grades D.at a different grade ( )7.A.and B.with C.but D.or

( )8.A.doing B.does C.with D.in


Once a great boxer (拳击家), Tom Brown, went to a restaurant(饭馆)for dinner. He put his bag near the 26

door, but he was afraid that someone would take it. So he got out a pen and a piece of paper and wrote on it: ―The great boxer, Tom Brown, left his bag here. He‘ll come back in a few minutes. ‖ He put the paper on his bag and went to have his dinner. When he came back, his bag wasn‘t there. But he found a piece of paper on the ground. It said: ―A great runner took away your bag, and he will not come back. ‖

( )1.Tom Brown went to the restaurant ________.

A.for his bag B.to see the runner C.to have his meal D.for his pen

( )2.Mr Brown was afraid ________.

A.to put down his bag near the door B.he couldn‘t find his pen

C.thieves would take his bag away D.he couldn‘t get enough food himself from the restaurant

( )3.Mr Brown wrote the words on the paper because he ________.

A.thought the thief would not steal (偷) his bag when he read the words B.was a boxer

C.wanted to catch the thief D.wanted to get to know the runner

( )4.When Mr Brown came back he ________.

A.found another piece of paper on the ground B.found his bag wasn‘t there

C.both A and B D.saw the runner running after him

( )5.Which is not right?

A.Mr Brown was foolish. B.The runner was a thief.

C.The runner made a joke on Mr Brown. D.The boxer didn‘t know the runner at all.



(1)先点后分:8:20 eight twenty 10:40 ten forty

(2)先分后点: 分钟+to+时钟 表示―几点差几分‖3:40 twenty to four

分钟+past+时钟 表示―几点过几分‖ 3:20 twenty past three

a quarter to three 3:15 three quarter past five 5:45 half past six 6;30

具体时间前用介词at 表示在几点

【2】What time 问具体的时间,具体到几点

When 问时间,范围比what time 广,可以是具体的时间,也可以是大概的时间

【3】几个短语:take sb to sp 带某人去某地 write to sb 写信给某人

tell sb about sth 告诉某人有关于某事 tell sb to do sth 告诉某人去做某事

practice sth.练习…. Practice doing sth. 练习做某事。Thanks for sth.谢谢某物,thanks for doing sth.谢谢做了某事。 Tell sb. about sth.告诉某人关于某事 tell sth. to sb=tell sb. sth 告诉某人某事

【4】 I’m the last one to take a shower.

1) the + 序数词 (first/ second/ ...last) to do sth. ―第几个做……‖, 例如:Gina is the first to know my e-mail address.

2) 洗澡:take/have a shower take/have a bath

【5】What a funny time to make breakfast! 做早饭的时间多么有趣!

1) 这是一个感叹句。感叹句用以表达说话者的感情,有what和how引导,what和how与所修饰的词放于句首,其它部分用陈述语序。


①被修饰词是不可数名词时,用 ―What+形容词+不可数名词+主语+谓语+……!‖ 例如: What great weather! What sweet water it is!

②被修饰词是可数名词单数时,用 ―What+a/an+形容词+单数可数名词+主语+谓语+……!‖ 例如: What an interesting movie it is!

③被修饰词是可数名词复数时,用 ―What+形容词+复数可数名词+主语+谓语+……!‖ 例如: What fantastic books they are!


① How+形容词+主语+谓语+……!‖ 例如:How expensive the shorts are! How boring the TV show is! ② How+副词+主语+谓语+……!‖ 例如:How loudly he talks!

2) 做早饭:make/cook breakfast (√) do breakfast (×)

【6】 After breakfast he practiced his guitar. 吃过早饭他练习吉它。

practice + n./doing sth. He often practices running after school.

注意:常见的后面跟动名词的动词有:enjoy, finish, mind etc.


【7】 He takes the number 17 bus to the Santon Hotel. 他坐17路公车去赛通宾馆。

by car = in the car = drive to by bus = on the bus = take a bus to by taxi = take a taxi to

on foot = walk to by air = by plane = fly to by water = by ship = by boat=by sea

注意:坐车: take a bus/car/taxi(√) sit a bus/car/taxi (×)

【8】 He works all night. 他整晚都在工作。

all (the) day 整天, 整个白天 all day and all night 整天, 整天整夜 all the year 整年 all the month 整个月 all the week 整个星期 all the summer 整个夏天

【9】 People love to listen to him.人们喜欢听他的演奏

listen to 听…… hear 听到……

例如: listen to the music 听音乐 hear the music 听到了音乐


1) 听老师说:listen to the teacher(√) listen to the teacher speak(×)

2) 动作短语: 表结果:

look at see

look for find

listen to hear

【10】He gets home at 7:00. 他七点钟到家。

到达:reach arrive in/at get to

1) home, here, there这几个副词前面不用介词,其用法如下:reach/ arrive/ get + home/ here/there

2) arrive in + 较抽象的大地方 arrive at + 具体的地方

10.take the number… bus to …乘…路公交车去….

11.listen, listen to, hear 的区别:

listen 是不及物动词,后面不能接宾语,只能单独使用。Listen to 强调听的动作。Hear 强调听的结果。

12.get, reach, arrive的区别:

Get和arrive 是不及物动词。要接宾语后面必须接介词。Get后接 介词to, arrive 接in 或at. Reach 可直接接宾语。



( )1. Here are your new clothes, please ___.A. put on them B. put it on C. put them on

( )2. Thanks for _________________ me. A. helping B. to help C. help

( )3. I am busy _______ English in my room. A. to read B. reading C. read

( )4. I want to know something ____ your evening. A. about B. on C. around

( )5. He ______ at 6:00 in the afternoon. A. get home B. gets to home C. gets home

( )6. ________ a good time to listen to him sing! A. How B. What C. Why

( )7. ________ at 7:30 in the morning. A. The classes begins B. Class begin C. Class begins

( )8. He _______his homework _______Sundays. A. doesn‘t, on B. don‘t do, in C. doesn‘t do, on

( )9. It‘s time ________________ school. A. go to B. for C. to go

( )10. You must __________________ a schedule. A. make B. write C. read

( )11. He is always the last one __________ to school. A. to B. to get C. get

( )12. A: Please _____ the word. B: S-C-H-O-O-L, school. A. write B. say C. spell

( )13. We usually eat _______________ lunch at 12:30. A. my B. the C. X

( )14. Mike often _________ a shower in the morning. A. makes B. have C. takes

( )15. Do you often watch news _______________ TV? A. by B. on C. in


Mike likes music very much. he was young, he wanted be a famous musician. But now he is a He works in a hospital. He light music when he is working. He finds are happy if they the beautiful music. So he puts a CD player the waiting room and plays the ( )1. A. What B. When C. Where ( )6. A. hear B. listen C. listen to

( )2. A. to B./ C. for ( )7 A. under B. in C. on

( )3. A. actor B. musician C. doctor ( )8. A. music B. movie C. opera

( )4. A. often B. never C. doesn‘t ( )9. A. date B. today C. day

( )5. A. a lot B. lot C. lots of ( )10. A. think B. like C. want




Mike works very long hours every day. He usually gets up at 17:00. He has a shower and makes his breakfast. What a funny time to make breakfast! After breakfast he practices his guitar, then he puts on his jacket and goes to work. To get to work, he takes the number17 bus to the Star Hotel. The bus usually leaves at 19:15. He works all night. People love to listen to him! He gets home at 7:00, and he watches the early morning news on TV. He goes to bed at 8:30, a tired but happy man. Can you think what his job is?

( )1. How long does Mike work? A. 7 hours B. 8 hours C. about 9 hours D. all night

( )2。 He ____________ and makes his breakfast.

A. gets up B. takes a shower C. works D. washes his face

( )3. What does Mike do after breakfast?

A. He goes to work. B. He puts on his clothes.

C. He practices his guitar, then puts on his jacket and goes to work. D. He practices his guitar.

( )4. Maybe he is _________.A. a worker B. a singer C. a writer D. a teacher

( )5. How does he go to work? A. By car B. By bikes C. On foot D. By bus


In many English homes people eat four meals a day. They have breakfast at any time from seven to nine in the morning. They eat porridge(粥) eggs or bread and drink tea or coffee at breakfast. Lunch comes at one o‘clock. Afternoon tea is from four to five in the afternoon and dinner is about half past seven. First they have soup, then they have meat or fish with vegetables. After they eat some other things, like bananas, apples or oranges. But not all English people eat like that. Some of them have their dinner in the middle of the day. Their meals are breakfast, dinner, tea and supper and all these meals are very simple.

( )6. Many English people have ______ meals a day. A. two B. three C. four D. five

( )7. People may have _______________ for their breakfast according to the passage.

A. tea and eggs B. hamburgers and tea C. coffee and salad D. eggs and fish

( )8. People have lunch at _______.A. any time B. nine C. five D. one

( )9. People don‘t have _____________________ for their dinner.

A. bananas and apples B. soup and meat C. meat and fish D. porridge

( )10. Most Englishmen have dinner ________________.

A. at one B. at any time C. at noon D. in the evening


1. She _____________ (通常) gets up at 6:30 a.m.

2. I often take a __________ (淋浴) before I go to bed.

3. He _________________ (工作) in a big factory.

4. What time do you often do your _____________ (作业)?

5. How many ______________ (字母) are there in English?

6. What are your best _______________ (祝愿)?

7. Their _____________ (工作) are standing and watching at the door.

8. My friends are coming ______________________ (不久).

9. He _____________ (听) to the teachers carefully in class.

10. My friend ____________ (写信) to me three times a month.


从不) go to school late.

A: Do you have breakfast at home? A: And when do you go to school? B: Class begins at 8:00, so I go to school at 7:45, A: B: I leave school at 5:05 and I get home at 5:15.


______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________



【1】I’m really busy today. 我今天真的很忙。

忙于做某事: be busy with sth. be busy (in) doing sth.

【2】All my classes finish at 2:00. 我所有的课都在两点钟结束。= All of my classes finish at 2:00. all 全部,所有

1) adj. 修饰名词 all the/one‘s + n.(pl) 例如:all the books all my friends

2) pron.

① all the/one‘s + n.(pl) = all of the/one‘s 例如:all the books = all of the books all my friends = all of my


② 作主语同位语时,应放在助动词、情态动词、be动词之后,行为动词之前,例如:

We are all students, we all work hard. The children all look nice.= All the children look nice.

= All of the children look nice.

【3】Our teacher is very strict and he makes me very tired. 我们的老师非常的严格,而且常使我感到很累。

1) strict 严格的

① be strict with sb. 对某人严格 My teacher is strict with us. Their parents are really strict with them ② be strict in sth. 对某事严格Our teacher is strict in our homework. He is strict in my work.

③be strict with sb. in sth. 对某人在某事方面严格 They are strict with me in my work.

Mr Green is strict with his son in his homework. She is strict with her sister in her study.

3) make + sb. + (feel) + adj. 使某人感到……,例如: That news really made me (feel) happy.

【4】几个短语: favorite=like…best 最喜爱……be busy doing sth 忙于做某事

be busy with sth 忙于某事 be tired of doing sth 做……感到厌烦


一、 单项选择

( ) favorite subject is biology. A. His B. He‘s C. He D. Him

( ) 2.I like biology and history. Why do you like ?

A .they B. it C. their D. them

( )3.Ann ________ English at 9:00 o‘clock. A. has B. have C . takes D. bring

( )4.She math it‘s boring.

A. doesn‘t likes, because B. doesn‘t like, and C. don‘t like, and D. doesn‘t like, because

( )5.After class I have gymnastics two hours. A. at B. for C. on D. in

( )6.Our teacher is very strict us. A. at B. for C. with D. in

( your favorite subject? What‘s B. What are C. Who‘s D. Science

( )8. We usually play sports ____three hours every day. A. for B. in C. of D. at

( )9.Our English teacher is her work.

A. strict with B. strict in C. is strict in D. strict at

( )10.In the gymnastics class, our teacher is always very strict and he me very .

A. make, tiring B. makes, tired C. is make, tired D. make, tired

二. 用动词的适当形式填空

1. He wants _____________________ (swim) in the pool.

2. He likes ____________________(run ) in the morning.

3. They often go _____________________( see ) an action movie.

4. School usually ______________(start) at 8:30 am and ___________________(finish) at 4:30 pm.

5. Please ______________( fill ) in the blanks.


Chinese. At 9:00 he has English .He English because it‘s interesting. At 11:00 he has music. That‘s his favorite subject! He lunch at 12:00.In the afternoon he

home at 4:00.He usually TV after dinner.

四. 完成短文

It ______Tuesday. At 8:00 he _______________( not have ) math. He _______(have) Chinese. Then at 9:00 he has science. It‘s difficult, ______ interesting. Next at 10:00 he has history. It‘s boring. But at 11:00 he has P.E. That‘s ______ favorite subject. He ____________ lunch at 12:00. After lunch, He has music, it‘s relaxing. He _____ his music teacher, Mr. Morgan. He‘s fun. All his classes _______ at 2:00. After class he has gymnastics _________ two hours. His teacher is very _______, and he _______ him very tired. But after that, he has Chinese history club. It‘s ______ interesting.



Unit 1 Where is your pal from?

( )1. Three ____ are talking about the machine. A. Germen B. German C. Germans

( )2. ____ speak English and French. A. Canadian B. Canada C. Canadians

【2】 be from =come from 来自 Linda is from Japan.= Linda comes from Japan.那么Where's your pen pal from?= Where does your pen pal come from ?

I live in China. Do you live in China? Yes,I do.No,I don‘t.I don‘t live in China. Where do you live? (where 是副词,和动词live搭配时,动词后不能加介词in) 住在哪层楼用live on。如:He lives on the fifteenth floor. ( )He lives_____ the fifth floor. A. in B. on C. at

【4】说某种语言用speak, speak Chinese/ English / Japanese / French 说汉语/英语/日语/法语 问某人说某种语言用句型What language do/does sb speak? What language do you speak? I speak Chinese. What language does Mary speak? She speaks English .

【5】14 years old 14岁 解释:数字+ year(s) old …岁 当数字大于1时,year用复数years。I am 30 years old. Her son is 1 year old.

can为情态动词,―能,能够,会‖。后面跟动词时必须用动词原形。肯定句变成一般疑问句需把can提到句首。肯定句变成否定句只需把can变成can't 既可。例如: She can speak English. Can she speak English? Yes, she can.No,she can't .She can't speak English. 【6】―Like+动词ing‖表示―喜欢做某事‖I like playing basketball. Tom likes listening to music.

注意:―Like+to+动词‖也表示―喜欢做某事‖,只是―Like+动词ing‖表示习惯性动作(也可以说是爱好),而―Like+ to +动词‖表示一次性或短暂性的。Our PE teacher likes swimming.( 表示爱好) He likes playing basketball, but today he doesn't like to play basketball.他爱好打篮球(爱好),但是今天他没去打篮球(短暂性的)。

( )His father likes _____ TV every evening. A. watch B. to watch C. watching

【7】Write to 人:写信给某人He often Writes to his mother. Do you often Write to your pen pal? 【8】on weekends 在周末

【9】favorite―最喜爱的‖。 My favorite sport is soccer. Hammbugers are my favorite.

【10】tell sb.about sth.告诉某人某 事 My mother often tell me about my grandfather.我的妈妈经常告诉我关于我爷爷的事。

【11】It‘s too difficult. 那太难了。

too ―太……‖。暗含过分的意思。后接形容词或副词。如:The table is too big. 这桌子太大了。 Please write and tell me about yourself. 请写信告诉我有关你自己的情况。 【课堂作业】 一、单项选择

( ) 1. There are ____________ three rooms in his house.


A. more B. than C. more than D. than more

( ) 2. The baby can‘t wait ________ his mother.

A. see B. seeing C. saw D. to see

( ) 3. There are about ____________ students in our school.

A. four thousand B. four thousands of C. four thousand of D. thousand of

( ) 4. ----When will they ______? ----_______ the seventh of July.

A. arrive, On B. arrive at, On C. arrive in, In D. arrive, In.

( ) 5. Her voice sounds _______. I don‘t want to listen to her singing.

A. good B. well C. bad D. badly

( ) 6. He was playing computer games _______ I was doing my lessons.

A. that B. while C. after D. so

( ) 7. Our teachers often share happiness and sadness _________ us.

A. to B. at C. with D. for

( ) 8. We‘ll have a_________ holiday. What about going to the West Lake?

A. three days B. three day C. three-days D. three days‘

( ) 9. 3,896 is____________.

A.three thousand, eight hundred and ninety-six B.three thousand, eight hundred ninety-six

C.three thousands, eight hundreds and ninety-six D.three thousand, eight hundred and ninety six

( )10. Where are our teachers? Are they in ________?

A. the room 809 B. Room 809 C. the 809 room D. 406 room

( )11. The air conditioner(空调) is ________ the window.

A. in B. above C. between D. inside

( )12. In the street I saw some __________ in the _________ car.

A. policemen; policemen B. policemen; police C. police; policemen D. policeman; policeman

( )13. That tennis ball is one of ___________.

A. Jane father B. Jane‘s father C. Jane father D. Jane‘s father‘s

( )14. They ________ carefully, but they didn‘t ________ anything.

A. listened; listen B. listened; hear C. heard; hear D. heard; hear

( )15. I think Maths is ______ useful subject. A. a. B. an. C. the D. /


Neil’s mother: Hello?

Simon: Neil’s mother: Simon: My name is Simon. I‘m calling ____ Shanghai.

Neil’s mother: Hello, Simon. I‘m ___Simon: Neil’s mother: OK. I‘ll ask him to ___

Simon: Thank you. Goodbye.

1. ________. 2. ________. 3. ________. 4. ________. 5. ________.

6. ________. 7. ________. 8. ________. 9. ________. 10.________.


Dear Shirley,

My name is Kitty. I‘m ___The flat is not very large. My share a bedroom with my sister Marie. Marie is only six. She can‘t read ___ happy there.

( ) 1. A. a B. an C. / D. the

( ) 2. A. years B. year old C. years old D. year-old

( ) 3. A. at B. for C. on D. in

( ) 4. A. on B. to C. at D. behind

( ) 5. A. live B. living C. lives D. lived

( ) 6. A. listen B. listening to C. to listen D. to listen to

( ) 7. A. with B. to C. for D. in

( ) 8. A. and B. with C. or D. while

( ) 9. A. a lot B. a lots C. a lot of D. a lots

( )10. A. friend B. friends C. unfriendly D. friendly


Yao Ming, the center of the Chinese National Men‘s basketball team, served the Houston Rockets in the 32

2002 NBA. The 2.26m,120kg center becomes the first one to come from a foreign team.

Yao Ming was born in Shanghai in September, 1980. His mother was a center and captain of the Chinese National Women‘s Team. His father played basketball, too.

Yao Ming is widely known in China. He came to be a very important basketball player in China Basketball Association(联赛). It‘s short for CBA. During the 2000-2001 season, he got 27.1 scores for the Shanghai Oriental(东方) Sharks in every match.

Yao Ming joined the Houston Rockets in November, 2002. He said this was a new start in his basketball life. He would do his best to learn from the NBA and improve himself.

Sport analyst(分析家) Bill Walton said, ―Yao Ming has the potential(潜力), the capability() of changing the future of basketball.‖

( ) 1. The Houston Rockets is the name of a ___________ team.

A. table tennis B. volleyball C. basketball D. golf.

( ) 2. Both Yao Ming‘s father and mother were ___________.

A. football players B. basketball players

C. the centers of Chinese National Team. D. the captains of the Chinese National Team.

( ) 3. Yao Ming ________ in CBA during the 2000-2001 season.

A. does well B. is good C. was good D. did well

( ) 4. Yao Ming _________ the Houston Rockets in November, 2002 .

A. did his best to join B. was well-known in C. became a member of D. took part in

( ) 5. Sport analyst Bill Walton thought Yao Ming was able to __________.

A. learn from the NBA. B. change the future of basketball

C. improve himself D. became the captain of the Houston Rockets.


1. 我母亲经常叫我不要在晚上看电视.

My mother often ___________ not ________ in the evening.

2. 照片上的第五位女孩是海伦的堂妹.

The __________ girl _______________ is ________________.

3. 对他来说学好数学是最重要的.

It‘s ______________ for him _____________________.

4. 恐怕明天我不能帮你做家务.

_________________ I can‘t help you ____________________.

5. 西蒙住在我楼上二层. Simon ____________ two floors ________________ me.

Unit 2 Where’s the post office?

【1】―There be结构的一般现在时基本句型如下:

肯定句:①There is(There's) a big supermarket near my home.(可数名词单数)在我家附近有一个大超市。

②There is(There's) some water in the glass.(不可数名词)在玻璃杯里有一些水。③There are 30 students in the classroom.(可数名词复数)在教室里有30个学生。

否定句There be结构的否定句只需在肯定句中be的后面加not即可。(is not =isn't,are not=aren't)。因此以上三句的否定句依次为:①There isn't a big supermarket near my home.名词单在我家附近没有大超市。 ②There isn't any water in the glass.在玻璃杯里没有水。(肯定句中的some,在疑问句和否定句中需要变成any) ③There aren't 30 students in the classroom.在教室里没有30个学生。



①Is there a big supermarket near your home?Yes,there is. No,there isn't.在我家附近有一个大超市吗? ②Is there any water in the glass?Yes,there is. No,there isn't.在玻璃杯里有一些水吗?③Are there 30 students in the classroom?在教室里有30名学生吗?Yes,there are. No,there aren't.

填空:一个星期有多少天?How many there a week? There are seven.有七天。

There a pen and two books on the desk. There two books and a pen on the desk.

【2】方位词的用法:①next to在…旁边,②between…and…在…和…之间③across from在…对面,④behind在…的后面,⑤in the neighborhood在附近,⑥in the front of在(物体里面的)前面,in front of在(物体外面的)前面,⑦on在…街上

①The library is next to the bank. ②The library is between the restaurant and the bank. ③The bank is across from the restaurant. ④The park is behind the bank.⑤There is a payphone in the neighborhood.


⑥There is a blackboard in the front of classroom.在教室的前面有一块黑板。(黑板在教室的里面)There is a big tree in front of classroom. 在教室的前面有一棵大树。(大树在教室的外面) ⑦The library is on YiMeng Street.

go straight一着往前走,turn left/right向左/右拐,on the left/right在左边/右边


the garden district 花园小区;take a walk 散步;

the beginning of …的开始Do you like the beginning of the movie?你喜欢这步电影的开头吗?

【3】enjoy喜欢,过得快乐(后面跟的动词必须加ing)。have fun玩得快乐;play the guitar弹吉他(play后跟乐器时必须加the,但后跟球类时不加the,例如:play basketball)

我喜欢这步电影I enjoy 。她喜欢看电视She TV.

【4】I know you are arriving next Sunday. 解释:―be+动词ing‖为现在进行时,在这句中next Sunday―下个星期天‖为将来时间。you are arriving next Sunday.是现在进行时表示将来动作的用法,这种情况多用于go,come,leave,arrive等表示动作来去的动词,例如:He is leaving tomorrow.明天他将离开。

【5】let sb do sth让某人做某事(let us=let's) let's play basketball.

(1)let是一个动词,常常引出祈使句,固定短语是let sb. do sth. (省略to的动词不定式)。如:Let's go to school! 让我们去上学吧!

He often lets us read English in the morning. 他经常让我们在早晨读英语。

与let结构相同的短语还有:make sb. do sth. 让某人做……help sb. do sth. 帮助某人做……

see sb. do sth. 看见某人做……hear sb. do sth. 听见某人做……其中see和hear为感官动词,构成的固定短语还有:see/hear sb. doing sth. 看见/听见某人正在做……

(2)tell是一个动词,构成的短语有:tell sb. sth. 告诉某人…tell sb. about sth. 告诉某人……

tell sb. to do sth. 告诉某人做……tell sb. not to do sth. 告诉某人别做……

如:He told me a funny story. 他给我讲了一个幽默故事。

Could you tell me about it? 关于这件事,你能给我讲一点吗?

She told me to finish the work. 她告诉我要完成工作。

I told him not to draw on the wall. 我告诉他不要在墙上乱画。

( )1.He saw a wallet ____ on the playground. A. lie B. lies C. to lie D. lying

( )2. I often hear her _____ the song. A. sing B. to sing C. sings D. singing

【6】the way to+地点:去某地的路 the way to school去上学的路上;the way home回家的路上(在home, here, there之前无修饰成分,为副词,去掉to)

On his way ____ home , he saw a goat _____ the crops.

【7】take a taxi 乘出租车;have a good trip旅途愉快



( )1. Is there a library? ___________. A. Yes, there is B. Yes, it is C. it isn‘t

( )2. I have a house ___________a small beautiful garden. A. on B. to C. with

( )3.Please look around. What can you see your right?A. in B. on C. at

( the supermarket. A. in B. on C. from

( A. bread B. baseballs C. clothes

( )6. there a bank along the street? A. Is B. Are C. Am

( A. in B. between C. near

( )8.The girl next ______ Nancy is talking to her in English.A. at B. in C. to

( )9.Where is ______ post office? A. a B. the C. an

( )10.Go ______ the street and then turn right ______ Bridge Street.

A. along; on B. down; at C. straight; on 


1.This room isn‘t .It‘s very big.

2.Look at your hands! They aren‘t.They‘re very dirty.

3.Don‘t turn 4.Give me that coat, please. That old one, not the one.

5.That‘s a busy street. This is a street.


1.我知道你下星期日将到。I Sunday..

2.这儿附近有图书馆吗? here?

3.让我来告诉你达飞机场的路。Let me you to the airport.



Come to street. You can play

in the park. It‘s there, the post office the restaurant . And if you‘re,you can t. It‘s from the post office.

( )1. A. visit B. see C. look .

( )2. A. have fun B. to have fun C. has fun

( )3 A. quite B. new C. busy

( )4. A. guitar B. the guitar C. a guitar

( )5. A. next B. near C. between

( )6. A. to B. and C. from

( )7. A. hungry B. happy C. nice

( )8. A. buy B. take C. bring

( )9. A. a B. the C. an

( )10. A. near B. next C. across


to through beginning from is left with to enjoy

Welcome the Garden District. Turn on Fist Avenue and city‘s quiet streets and

small parks. Take a walk the park on Center Avenue. the an old hotel. Next an interesting garden. This is the 六、拼写单词,单词的第一个字母已给出

2.The hotel is o______ Seventh Avenue.

4. If you want to mail a letter, you will go to the p______.

__ the street from the library.


Peter and Charly will go to the movie house. But Peter doesn‘t know the way.

Charly writes the way on a piece of paper.

Walk straight the Sun Avenue until you see a restaurant. Turn left and you are on the Center Street. You

will go past a library. Then turn right. Go straight and you will see a park in front of you. Go through the park

and turn left. After you pass the seventh shop, you will see a supermarket. The movie house is next to the

supermarket. You can‘t miss(错过) it.



(2)Is the movie house near Peter‘s home?

Unit 3 Why do you like koalas?



①I am a student.我是一个学生。②He likes apples.他喜欢苹果。③She has a bike.她有一辆自行车。

这些动词常与often, usually, always, every day/morning/week/month/year…,sometimes(有时),on Sundays,

never(从不,从来没有),once a week(每周一次)等连用。例如:

④I go to school every day.我每天去上学。⑤He doesn't work on Sundays.他星期天不工作。

(2)表示普遍真理或客观事实。例如:① It is hot in summer.夏天天气热。(普遍真理/客观事实)

②There is a big tree near the house.房子附近有一棵大树。(客观事实)

③The sun rises(v, 升起)in the east.太阳从东方升起。(普遍真理)


①He is at work now.他现在在工作。(表示主语的状态)

②Do you speak English?你会讲英语吗?(表示主语的能力)

③I like swimming.我喜欢游泳。(表示主语的喜好)

(4)表示计划、安排的将来动作,也可用一般现在时。如go, come, leave, arrive, be, start, begin



以这样使用。例如:①She comes back tonight.她今晚回来。(现在还未到晚上,她还未回来)

②The meeting is at 8:30,don't be late .八点钟开会,别迟到。(会还未开,还没有迟到)

【2】be from =come from 来自 Linda is from Japan.= Linda comes from Japan.

where ____Linda ____?=Where does Linda _____ ______?

【3】What animal do you like?用于询问对方喜欢什么动物。例如:

What animal do you like? I like pandas. They're cute.

What animal does Tom like? He likes dolphins. They're friendly.

【4】play with玩…,和…一起玩 Mary often plays with us.玛丽经常和我们一起玩。 The boy is playing

with a ball.那个男孩正在玩球。

She likes ___ ____ ___ her friends and eat grass. =She likes to ____ ___ her friends and She likes to eat grass.

【5】like to do 与like doing 的用法和区别

He likes ___________ TV, and his brother likes ________ computer games.


He is very fat, ___ he doesn't like PE.class.他很胖,因此他不喜欢体育刻。=_____ he is very fat, he doesn't like

PE.class.=He doesn't like PE.class _____ he is very fat. (because引导的句子可以放前面,也可以放在后面) leaf的复数为leaves



1. Let's go to the zoo on weekends. There are many a_________________ there.

2. D____________________ are smart and interesting. They live in water.

3. He doesn't want to do any homework and he is l__________________.

4. The e_______________________ has a long nose and big ears.

5. This yellow skirt looks very b______________________. I like it very much.

6. We like listening to the music d________________________ the night.

7. P________________________ are very friendly, they only live in China.

8. ---Where is Qingdao? --- You can see it in the m______________ of China.

9. I think the movie is k_________________ of interesting. Do you want to read it?

10. I have two sisters. One is a worker, the o________________________ ia a teacher.


1. Let's go to the park ____________________(one).

2. There are many _____________________(leaf) on the ground.(操场)

3. The boys want _____________________________(paly) soccer now.

4. Please ____________________________(bring) these things to me.

5. Lisa often ________________________ (do) her homework at school.

6. What a funny time ________________________(have) supper.

7. Let's ___________________________(take) a bus to work.

8. Bridge Street is a good place________________________(have) fun.

9. What animal ________________________(live) only in China.

10. What other _______________________(animal) do you like.


( )1. My mother usually goes to bed late ____ night. A: at B: in C: on D:for

( )2. That little animal is very ____. Please don't talk here A: shy B: fun C: cute D: interesting

( )3. What ____ things can you see in the piature? A: the other B: others C: other D:any

( )4. ---Isn't Amy tall? ---____. A: Yes, she is B: No. she is C: Yes, she isn't D: No, she does

( )5. Koalas sheep ____ the day, but ____ night they get up and eat leaves.

A: at, in B: during, at C: in , in D: at, at

( )6. ---Are there any animals in the zoo? ---______.

A: Yes, there are. B: Yes, they are. C: No, they aren't. D: No, there are.

( )7. ---How many elephants are there in the zoo? --- There aren't _______.

A: some B: any C: one D: much

( )8. Pandas like eating ____ and elephants like eating ___.

A: leafs, grass B: leaves, grass C: leaf, grass D: leaf, grasses

( )9.- __do they go to the zoo? ---Because they want to see the tigers. A: Why B: Where C: What D: How

( )10. Look! The meat ___ on the table. The apples ___ in the bag.

A: is, are B: are ,is C: are,are D: is ,is

( )11. We are in the library. Please ____ quiet. A: can B: be C: do D: are

( )12. Larry likes English, ____ he doesn't like math. A: but B: and C: so D: are


( )13. Does Linda want____ the dolphins? A: to see B:see C: seeing D: sees

( )14. The little girl is ____ beautiful. A: kind B: a kind C: a kind of D: kind of

( )15. Molly doesn't do her homework____.

A: at the night B: at night C: on the night D: in night


1. ---你为什么喜欢树袋熊?---因为它们有趣。

---_____ do you like koalas? ---_______ they are interesting.

2.---难道你不是学生吗? ---不,我是. ---_______ you a student? ---_______, I _______.

3. 不要和老虎玩,它们很可怕. Don't _______ _______ the tigers. They are _______.

4. 他很懒,因此他喜欢睡觉. He is _______ ,so he likes _______.

5. 那两只狮子来自南非. The two lions _______ _______ South Africa.

6. 树袋熊很有趣,而且有点聪明. Koalas are very interesting and _______ _______ clever.

7. 有些动物白天睡觉,夜晚起来. Some animals sleep_______ the day and get up ____ ___.

8. 他很忙,每天都只能休息六个小时.

He is very ________,and he can _______ for only six hours every day.

9. 我们先去看看那些可爱的熊猫吧. _______ go to see the cute pandas ________.

10. 请安静,这个孩子在睡觉. Please _________ ________. The baby is sleeping.



A. Why do you like them? B. Do you like elephants C. What animals do you like? D. What are they? E. What do you want to see first? F. Where are they? G. Why do you want to see them first?

A: There are many new animals in the zoo. Do you know? B: Oh?__1__( )

A: Giraffes,elephants, pandas, lions, and monkeys. B: Let's go and see them.

A: OK. __2__( ) B: I want to see pandas first.

A: __3__( ) B: Because they are very cute. __4__( )

A: I like elephants. B: __5__( )

A: Because they big, but they are very friendly.

there. Her name is Ling ling. She is from __6__ . She is only five years old. She's very __7__. Children like her very much. They want to __8__ her, but Ling Ling is very__9__ . So the keeper(饲养员)in the zoo tell them to be __10__.

1. _________ 2. ________ 3. ________ 4. ________ 5. ________

6. _________ 7. ________ 8. ________ 9. ________ 10. _________



In our city there is a big zoo. There are a lot of different aniamls in it. There are some scary tigers and lions. They like eating meat and they eat much meat every day.

There are also two big elephants and a baby(婴儿)one. Children like to ride(骑)one of them. the elephants are very kind and friendly. They eat much grass and bananas.

In the zoo, we can see different kinds of bears, brown(褐色的)bears, black bears and white bears. They are all slow and clumsy. They stand on their back legs and lift their front legs to ask for food. They like cakes very much.

Do you like pandas? There's only one in the zoo. Her name is Lingling. She is very cute. She likes eating bamboo a lot. She is kind of shy. She's very interesting and lovely.


( )1. What do tigers and lions like eating? They like eating ___. A: fruit B: meat C: vegetables D: rice

( ) 2. How many elephants are there in the zoo? There are _____. A: one B: two C: three D: four

( )3. What color are the bears in the zoo?A: black B: brown C: white D: A, B and C

( )4. Bears stand on their ____ legs and lift their ____legs to ask for food.

A: front, back B: back, back C: front, front D: back, front

( ) 5. Which one of the following(下面) is NOT right?

A: Children like to ride on the elephants in the zoo. B: The elephants are very friendly to people.

C: The bears always ask for food with their back legs. D: Elephants like bananas very much.


We are going to visit the zoo tomorrow. Our city has a big zoo with a lot of aniamls in it.


There are two big elephants in the zoo. I want to ride on them. The elephants eat a lot of grass every day. They like children because sometimes give them bread and bananas. The elephants like bananas very much.

Some aniamls are very friendly, but some are dangerous. I think the most interesting animals in the zoo are the dolphins. They swim so fast and jump so high. I like watching them swim and jump. They can play with a ball. They can stand up and walk on water. They are friendly to people. They can help you when you fall into (掉进)water and can't swim. I like them very much.


6. Is there a big zoo in their city? ______________________________________________

7. How many elephants are there in the zoo?____________________________________

8. What food do the elephants eat?___________________________________________

9. Can rhe dolphins play with a ball?__________________________________________

10. Aren't the dolphins friendly to people?_____________________________________



Unit 4 I want to be an actor.

【1】What do you do?(= What +is╱am╱are+sb?/ What +is╱am╱are+one's job?)用来询问对方的职业。例如:What do you do?(=What are you?/What's your job?) I'm a waiter/policeman/docter/student. What does Tom do?(= What's Tom?/ What's Tom′s job?) He is a student.

What does Tony's father do? He's '(=He is) a policeman.

What‘s your father?= What ___ your father _____ ?= What‘s your father‘s ______?

【2】What do you want to do?用来询问对方想从事什么职业。例如:

What do you want to do? I want to be a policeman.

What does she want to do? She wants to be an actor.

Want to do 想做某事 I want to go home.我想回家。Do you want to watch Tv?你想看电视吗?

【3】give sb sth给某人某物=give sth to sb 把某物给某人

你能给我一枝钢笔吗?Can you give ____ __ ____? = Can you give ____ ___ ___ ___?请给我一个苹果。Please give________ _____ _____.=Please give___________ _________ _____ ______.

【4】in the day在白天 at night 在晚上 thief 的复数为thieves

【5】call sb at+电话号码:给某人打电话,电话号码是… Please call me at 78966616.请拨打78966616找我。

【6】talk with/to sb 与某人谈话



1.A shop ________________________(助手) sells things in a shop.

2.These young men are all police ____________________________(警官).

3.My little brother wants ______________________(成为) a doctor when he grows up.

4. There is a _____________________________(杂志)on the desk.

5.I know some famous________________________(演员).

二、 单项选择

( )1.That‘s ______ interesting work. A. a B. an C. the D. /

( )2.--_______– I‘m a reporter. A. What do you do? B.Who are you? C. What are you? D. Both A and C. ( )3. __ does your father work? --- In a hospital. A.What B.How C.Where D.Which

( )4.It‘s_______ to climb the tall tree, be careful. A.danger B.dangerous C.busy D.difficult

( )5. The woman can speak _______ Chinese. A. a little B. a few C. lot of D. many

( )6.There are three __ in the office. A. policeman B. policemen C. polices D. policewoman

( )7. I like to_______ with my friends. A. speak B. say C. tell D. talk

( )8. He wants to be an actor________it‘s an exciting job. A. and B. so C. because D. why

( )9.Our school is ________children _______6-12. A. in, for B. for, in C. of, for D. for, of

( )10. Does Mr. White ____ in Beijing?

A. likes working B. likes work C. like working D. like work


I work in a small shop. It's near an English 1 . Every day, students come to 2 things.


In the morning, I get up 3 six and then have breakfast. I go to 4 by bike. I 5 to the shop at about six forty. The shop 6 at seven. We sell things 7 food and drink. We have school things, too. So there 8 often many people in our shop 9 morning to evening.

I have 10 in the shop. At seven in the evening the shop is closed.

( )1、A.farm B.factory C.school D.river

( )2、A.buy B.sell C.take D.want

( )3、A.on B.in C.at D.from

( )4、A.school B.bed C.class D.work

( )5、A.go B.get C.stay D.look

( )6、A.opens B.open C.is opening D.is opened

( )7、A.with B.like C.for D.about

( )8、A.are B.have C.see D.come

( )9、A.in B.on C.at D.from

( )10、A.supper B.breakfast C.tea D.lunch



Mr Smith is an English teacher. He comes from America. He has a daughter. Her name is Amy, and she is a good engineer in New York. Mr Smith likes traveling very much, and he can speak Spanish very well. Now he is in China, so he wants to learn some Chinese. He works very hard at his Chinese, and goes to Chinese classes every evening. He has a lot of friends in China and they often help him. He likes to talk with them. He tells his daughter that he can speak good Chinese, and he doesn‘t have any trouble with his Chinese, but the Chinese have a lot.

( )1.Mr Smith works in ____. A. a hospital B. a police station C. a school D. a restaurant

( )2.Mr Smith is good at __________. A. Chinese B. Japanese C. Spanish D. French

( )3.He learns Chinese ___ .A. very well B. not very well C. we don‘t know D. very good

( )4.Where does he learn Chinese? ____.

A. In an evening school . B.At home. C. In his friend‘s home. D. In a park.

( )5.Does he study very hard ? _________.

A. Yes, he doesn‘t. B. No, he doesn‘t. C. Yes, he does. D. No, he don‘t.


There are four people in my family. My father is a policeman. His work is kind of dangerous. He‘s very busy. He often has meals outside. Sometimes we can‘t see him all day. But I love him very much. My mother is a bank clerk, but she wants to be a reporter. She says her job is a boring and being a reporter is interesting, because she can meet many interesting people. My brother is a waiter. He likes his work, because he thinks he can meet many new friends when he works.

I‘m a middle school student. I study hard because I want to be a teacher. I think it‘s not difficult for me. ( )66.My family has four people, my father, my mother, my sister and I.

( )67.My father works in another city, so we can‘t see him all day, sometimes.

( )68.My mother likes to be a bank clerk.

( )69.My brother works in a restaurant. He likes to make new friends.

( )70.I want to be a teacher. It‘s easy for me ,I think.


Four friends are in a small town. Their names are Cook, Miller, Smith and Carter. They all have different work. One is a teacher. One is a driver. One is a doctor and one is a farmer.

One day* Cook‘s son breaks his foot, and Cook takes him to the doctor. The doctor‘s sister is Smith‘s wife. Cook isn‘t a driver. The farmer isn‘t married*. He has many good hens*. Miller gets eggs from the farmer every week. The teacher sees Smith every morning because they are neighbors.*

Now please tell me what they do ?

1.Cook is a ________ __. 2. Smith is a ________ _. 3.Carter is a _______ _ . 4.Miller is a ________

5.Cook, Smith, Carter and Miller are __________________.

四、 写作(Writing)8分+书写(Handwriting)



Unit 5 I’m watching TV



①I am writing a letter.我正在写信。 ②He is watching TV now.现在他正在看电视。③They are reading.他们正在读书。


We are working on a farm these days. I am writing a book this month.

2)现在进行时的标志词:now,these days,look,listen。例如:

①He is playing basketball now.现在他正在打篮球。

②The students are helping the farmers these days.这些天学生们正在帮助农民。

③Look!They are dancing in the classroom.看!他们正在教室里跳舞。


【2】 want to+动词:想做某事 I want to go to movies.我想去看电影。

现在他想回家。She wants __ ___ _____ now.→Does she want to go home now? Yes,she does.

No,she doesn't.→She doesn‘t want to go home now.→What does she want to do now?

【3】go to the movies去看电影;do one's homework做(某人的)作业;write a letter 写信 ;


at six o'clock在六点钟; on Sunday morning在星期天的早上;in September在九月; in 1998在1998年 _____ a early morning, he saw a man _____( cry) when he drove a car to cross the Dorfing Street.

【5】wait for 人/物:等待某人/某物 She is waiting for a bus.

【6】talk to人/talk with人:与某人谈话 ①Tom is talking to his teacher.汤姆正在和他的老师谈话。

②Tom's mother is talking with his teacher. 汤姆的妈妈正在和他的老师谈话。(注意:talk to人/talk with人有一点区别,―talk to人‖是一方说,一方听,例如①;―talk with人‖是双方互相交谈,例如②。)

【7】talk about sth谈论某事或某物 They are talking about the movie.他们正在谈论这部电影。

【8】in/at the library在图书馆;at the pool在游泳池;in/at the school在学校;at the mall在商业街/在购物广场;(补充)at home在家里;at the art club在艺术俱乐部;at shool在学校

【9】thanks for+名词/代词/V–ing相当于thank you for+名词/代词/V–ing:意为―因…而感谢你‖

Thanks for helping me.(help为动词)谢谢你帮助我。 Thanks for your e-mail.(e-mail)谢谢你的电子邮件。

【10】Here are some of my photos.这里是我的一些照片。在here,there等引导的句子中,谓语动词为be时,be的单/复形式要与后面的主语保持一致。例如:

Here are some new books.这有些新书。Here is your money.(money为不可数名词)给你钱。



( ) 1. — How do you go to school? — I go to school A. by a bus B. in a bus C. take a bus D. on a bus

( ) 2. — do you watch TV? — Twice a week.

A. How long B. How often C. How many D. What time

( ) 3. — Wow! What a nice dress you are wearing! — A. Thank you. B. I think so. C. Yes, it is. D. No, it‘s bad.

( ) 4. Wow! These flowers very nice. Do you like them?

A. look B. looks C. to look D. looked

( ) 5. — Excuse me, is this ______ watch? — No, it‘s not . It‘s Tom‘s.

A. your; myself B. yours; mine C. your; mine D. your; my

( ) 6. They usually get up 8:00 Sunday.

A. on; on B. at; at C. on; at D. at; on

( ) 7. It‘s seven thirty. It‘s time to B. getting up C. gets up D. geting up

( ) 8. Jane can play piano, but she can‘t play basketball.

A. /; / B. /; the C. the; / D. the; the

( ) 9. — May I have your name, please? —

A. I‘m a student. B. No, you can‘t. C. You can call me Tom. D. My friend is Tom.

( ) 10. Ann often lunch at home with her parents. A. have B. has C. eat D. eating

二. 完形填空。

What do you do at weekends? Some people like to at home, but others like to go for a walk have a picnic. My friend Jack works hard in a factory on . At weekends he always the same thing. On Saturday he his car and on

he takes his family to a nearby village. His uncle and aunt have a 40

farm there. It isn‘t a one, but there‘s always to do. The children help with the animals and give them their and Jack‘s aunt gives them a big meal.

( ) 1. A. play B. live C. stay D. like

( ) 2. A. and B. or C. but D. so

( ) 3. A. day B. time C. autumn D. weekdays

( ) 4. A. does B. makes C. borrows D. has

( ) 5. A. watches B. drives C. sells D. washes

( ) 6. A. Monday B. Wednesday C. Saturday D. Sunday

( ) 7. A. small B. big C. hard D. short

( ) 8. A. much B. little C. fast D. far

( ) 9. A. clothes B. places C. food D. drinks

( ) 10. A. clean B. late C. tired D. friendly

三. 阅读理解。


Mr. Green is from England. He and his wife are teachers. They teach English in Chongqing. They have a son and a daughter. Their names are Jack and Mary. Jack is ten. He is a student in a school. But Mary isn‘t a student. She is only five. They have two bikes and a car. One bike is big, the other is small. The big one is for Jack, and the small one is for Mary. Mr. and Mrs. Green go to work in their car. They don‘t like to stay at home on Saturdays and Sundays. They sometimes go to the park. Sometimes they go to their friends‘ homes. They have a lot of friends in China.


( ) 1. The Green family is in now. A. England B. China C. the U.S.A. D. Japan

( ) 2. The Greens teach in China. A. English B. Chinese C. Japanese D. math

( ) 3. The small bike is A. Mr. Green‘s B. Jack‘s C. Mrs. Green‘s D. Mary‘s

( ) 4. The Greens go to work .A. on their bike B. in their car C. on foot D. on feet

( ) 5. They don‘t like to stay at home A. on Sundays B. on Saturdays C. Both A and B. D. We don‘t know.


Hello, my name is Jim Green. I‘m a student at No. 14 Middle School. I have classes from Monday to Friday. I have many things to do after class. On Monday and Wednesday, I help my friends with their English. On Tuesday, I make model planes. On Friday afternoon, I have a good rest at home and do my homework.

Now it is 8:30 in the morning. I am sitting in the classroom and having a math class. I am listening to the teacher carefully. My friends Li Lei and David are looking at the blackboard. Lucy is thinking. Li Mei is writing something. All of them are working hard.


( ) 6. Jim Green is a student at No.14 Middle School.

( ) 7. He has classes from Monday to Saturday.

( ) 8. He helps his friends with their Chinese.

( ) 9. Now he is listening to his English teacher.

( ) 10. All the students are working hard.

四. 情景交际。从方框内选择恰当的句子补全对话,使对话完整、通顺、其中有两项是多余的。(10分)

( ) A: Hello, Maria!

( ) B: Sometimes. So I ride a bike or walk to school sometimes.

( ) A: A: Does he come back home very late?

( ) B: Yes. ( ) A: A: Really? That‘s good. Then you and your mother can go to school together.


Unit 6 It’s raining!


名词 意思 形容词 意思 名词 意思 形容词 意思

Sun 太阳 sunny 晴朗的 wind 风 windy 有风的;多风的

Cloud 云 cloudy 多云的;有云

rain(动词)下雨;snow(动词)下雪 反义词:hot——cold;warm——cool

【2】How's the weather (in 地点)?=What's the weather like(in 地点)?(某地的)天气怎么样? How's the weather in BeiJing?=What's the weather like in BeiJing? It's cloudy/ sunny/ windy.

【3】How's it going?(= How's everything going?)两者均表示―一切好吗?‖―近来怎么样?‖,用来询问对方的工作、学习或生活情况。―Great!‖是―It's great!‖的缩写形式,在口语中可以表示―妙;好‖之意。还

可以根据情况回答―Not bad.‖;―Terrible.‖;―Pretty good.‖。

【4】Thank sb for +名词/代词/V ing意为―因某事而感谢某人‖

谢谢你帮助我。Thank you for_______ _____.谢谢你的帮助。Thank you for ______ ____.


There are a lot of people in the park. ____ are walking and _____ are swimming.公园里有许多人,有的在散



【7】Look at this grop of people playing beach volleyball.解释:划线部分为现在分词做people的宾语补足语

【8】have a good time意为―玩得开心,过得快乐‖


I. 单项选择。

( ) 1. — What‘s your favorite — Physics.

A. animal B. subject C. sport D. food

( ) 2. Our school is the hospital. A. next to B. next C. to next D. in next

( ) 3. Why not upstairs and have a look? A. goes B. going C. go D. to go

( ) 4. We usually in the kitchen. A. cook B. cooks C. cooking D. to cook

( ) 5. Don‘t put your books on the floor. Please them A. put; on B. put; in C. put; down D. put; away

( ) 6. The study is the second floor. A. in B. on C. at D. with

( ) 7. There is a small garden my house.

A. in front of B. front C. front of D. in the front of

( ) 8. You must your pet dog. Don‘t let it run here and there.

A. look up B. look C. look like D. look after

( ) 9. — bedrooms are there in your house? — Four.

A. How B. How much C. How many D. How often

( ) 10. — What‘s behind the door? — two balls.

A. There is B. There are C. There has D. There have

II. 完形填空。

This is a sitting room. There is a photo the wall. Look at it, please. It‘s a picture of my woman and the man in the are my mother and father. On the left is my on the right is me. You see, it‘s a family of people.

That is my room. There is a big bag my desk. My room is over there. She after

her room very well. You can see a desk, too. But it is not big. 9 are some pens on the desks. How 10 Kate‘s room is!

( ) 1. A. in B. on C. at D. to

( ) 2. A. family B. home C. house D. people

( ) 3. A. left B. right C. middle D. behind

( ) 4. A. mother B. father C. brother D. sister

( ) 5. A. much B. many C. four D. three

( ) 6. A. in B. after C. of D. on

( ) 7. A. sister‘s B. brother C. sister D. brother‘s

( ) 8. A. sees B. watches C. looks D. takes

( ) 9. A. Three B. Those C. There D. They

( ) 10. A. well B. nice C. fine D. small

III. 阅读理解。


I live in a house near the sea. It‘s an old house, about 50 years old, and it‘s very small. There are



bedrooms upstairs but no bathroom. The bathroom is downstairs(楼下) next to the kitchen and there‘s a living room with a lovely old fireplace(壁炉). There‘s a garden in front of the house. The garden goes down to the beach(海滩). In spring and summer, there are flowers everywhere.

I live alone(单独地) with a dog, Boxer, but I have a lot of friends. Many of my friends work in the city, so they often stay with me because they want to relax(放松).

I love my house for many reasons: the garden, the flowers in spring and summer, the fire in winter, but the best thing is the view(风景) from my bedroom windows.

( ) 1. I live in a house . A. in a city B. in the sea C. near the sea D. with two kitchens

( ) 2. There is on the first floor.

A. a bedroom and a bathroom B. a living room, a kitchen and a fireplace

C. a garden D. a dog

( ) 3. In front of the house, there is . A. a garage(车库) B. a garden C. a tree D. fire

( ) 4. Boxer is B. visitor C. on the second floor D. the name of a dog

( ) 5. Which of the following is NOT right?

A. I live with my family there. B. I have many good friends.

C. I like living there. D. We know the house has two stories(层).


Li Qiang and Li Gang are twins. But their life habits(习惯) are quite different. Now let‘s go to Li Qiang‘s room. Li Qiang tidies up his bedroom every day and puts everything in the right place. Look! There is a computer on the desk. There are two balls under the bed. A guitar and a kite are on the wall. All the things are placed in order. So he must be a careful boy. Now let‘s go to Li Gang‘s house. The room is in a mess. His clothes are on the bed. Some books and newspapers are on the floor. What‘s that on the desk? Oh, a fork and a knife. All of the things are out of order. Li Gang never does some cleaning on weekends. No wonder his room is in such a mess.

How do you think of Li Qiang and Li Gang?

( ) 6. What‘s the relationship(关系) between Li Qiang and Li Gang?

A. Brothers. B. Sisters. C. Friends. D. Father and son.

( ) 7. Where is the guitar?

A. On the floor. B. On the wall. C. In Li Gang‘s house. D. On the desk.

( ) 8. The room is in a mess. What does it mean in Chinese?

A. 干净,整洁 B. 在衣橱间 C. 在一块儿 D. 乱七八糟

( ) 9. What do you think of Li Gang? A. Careful. B. Careless. C. Tall. D. Short.

( ) 10. Where should a fork and knife be put?

A. Bedroom. B. Living room. C. Kitchen. D. Bathroom.

IV. 情景交际。从方框内选择恰当的句子补全对话,使对话完整、通顺,其中有两项是多余的。

(It’s Sunday today. Liu Yan and her little brother, Liu Tao, stay at home. Liu Yan is watching TV. Liu Tao is looking for something.)

A: Hi, Liu Yan.

( ) B: A: Are my keys in the desk? B: No, they aren‘t. They‘re on the floor.

( ) A: OK. Is it on the floor, too?

( ) B: It‘s on the sofa. A: Where‘s my basketball?

( ) B: A: Oh, where‘s my sports shoes?

( ) B:

V. 词汇运用。用括号中所给词的适当形式填空。

1. — Why not ________(sing) an English song together? — Good idea.

2. There ________ (be) some money in that purse.

3. — Is there a bathroom on the ________ (two) floor? — Yes, there is.

4. — How many ________ (box) are there? — Only one.

5. — You must ________ (look) after your things. — Thanks. I will.


Unit 7 What does he look like?

【1】short/long hair短/长头发 curly/straight hair卷/直发 tall/short高矮 medium height 中等身高 heavy/thin胖瘦 medium build 中等身材

【2】What does he look like?用来描述别人长的什么样;回答时常用句型为:

①Sb+ be+ 形容词(tall/short/heavy/thin) ②Sb+have/has+名词/名词词组(short/long hair;curly/straight hair) ③Sb+ be of+ medium height/ medium build

What does your father look like?你爸爸长什么样?He's tall.He has short,straight hair.他很高,留着短而直的头发。What does his mother look like?She is of medium build,and she has long hair.

【3】stop+V ing 停止正在做的事 Stop running.停止跑步。

Stop to +V停止正在做的事去做别的事 Stop to run.停下来去跑步。

他们停止了读书开始写起来。They stop _____ _______ _______.

【4】like+V ing/to V喜欢做某事,爱好做某事

―Like+动词ing‖表示―喜欢做某事‖I like playing basketball.Tom likes listening to music.

注意:―Like+to+动词‖也表示―喜欢做某事‖,只是―Like+动词ing‖表示习惯性动作(也可以说是爱好),而―Like+to+动词‖表示一次性或短暂性的。Our PE teacher likes swimming.( 表示爱好) He likes

____basketball, but today he doesn't like___ _____ basketball.他爱好打篮球(爱好),但是今天他没去打篮球(短暂性的)。

【5】I think+句子,意为―我认为…‖,think引导的句子如果表示否定意义,否定转移到动词think前,因此该句子的否定句为―I don't think+句子‖。就是在 I think后面的从句中,如果有否定含义,往往需要把否定词从从句移到主句,称为否定转移。

I think he is only 12 years old.→(否定句) I ____ _____ he is only 12 years old.

【6】But my mom does.在英文中,常常用do,does或have代替上文中的动词短语,而不能直接用某一个动词来替代。例如I don't have a long hair, but my sister does.我没有长发,但我妹妹有。



1.She w______ in a hospital.She is a doctor.

2.My brother isn‘t tall or short.He is m ______ height.

3.The Chinese boy has short,s______ hair.

4.Do you know the woman w______ long,blond,curly hair?

5.What does Merry l______ like?She is short and a little bit heavy.

6.My little brother loves telling jokes and she never stops t______.

7.Her father is really tall and h______ and her uncle is short and thin.

8.The rock singer has a new i______.He wears glasses and he has long hair now.

9.Brown is a member of our basketball team.He is also the c______ of our basketball team.

10.He looks very cool when he w______ his sunglasses.


1.Lei Hao ______ short and straight hair.

2.Dick ______ tall,but his sister ______ short.

3.Xie Kai ______ medium height.

4.Betty‘s mother ______ medium build.

5.Du Ke ______ short and thin.


6.Does Mary (are/wear)______ glasses?

7.What (do/have)______ the new students look like?

8.Wang Bin (wears/is)______ tall and fat.

9.Mr.Santos (has/does)______ a medium build.

10.(Has/Is)______ Henry's moustache black?


Rick:Is that your friend Betty? Anne:No,______ ______.

Rick:______ ______ ______ ______ ______?

Anne:Well,she‘s tall and thin.And she has long and straight hair.

Rick:What ______ ______ ______ ______ ______?

Anne:She usually wears green blouse and white skirt.


( )1.Are you ______ Chinese or Japanese?A.an B./ C.the D.one


( )2.The boy ______ his father.

A.look like B.is loved C.is liked D.is like

( )3.Miss Su teaches ______ English______.

A.us;well B.our;well C.us;good D.our;good 

( )4.It's half past ten now.I think the shop ______.

A.opens B.is open C.is opening D.open 

( )5.This is ______ sharpener.______ is over there.

A.him; Hers B.his; Hers C.mine; His D.yours; Mine 

( )6.—How do you like the food? — ______.

A.Very much B.Very well C.Very nice D.Very good 

( )7.I have ______ to do this evening.

A.a lot of works B.many work C.a lot of work D.some works 

( )8.They watch TV ______ Sunday evening,but we ______.

A.on; don't B.in; do C.on; aren't D.in; are 

( )9.There is ______ food here.We have to buy some.

A.any B.some C.no D.not

( )10.My grandfather ______ bald,but my father ______ short,blonde,curly hair.

A.has;has B.is;has C.has;is D.is;is

五.完形填空。 

often killed because they can not hear very well.Children are often killed because they are not A car,truck or bus can not stop .If the car is going very fast,it will travel many meters before it stops.People don't always understand this.They think a car can few meters.The faster a car is traveling,the longer it takes to stop.It is very for a person to know how fast a car is traveling.

The ,the road is clear,it is safe to the road,they may fall down.

( )1.A.over B.across C.cross D.through 

( )2.A.and B.but  C.both D.or 

( )3.A.care B.careful C.strong D.healthy 

( )4.A.before B.after C.since D.for 

( )5.A.ate B.early C.quickly D.slowly 

( )6.A.during B.among  C.between D.in 

( )7.A.easy B.difficult C.busy D.trouble 

( )8.A.few B.only C.often D.always 

( )9.A.if B.before C.which D.what 

( )10.A.hard B.danger C.safe D.dangerous 

六.Reading comprehension.阅读理解。

Australia is the greatest island in the world.It is a little smaller than China.It is in the south of the earth.So when there is hot summer in our country,it is cold winter in Australia.

Australia is big,but the population(人口)there is thin.The population of Australia is the same as that of Shanghai,a city in China.

Australia is famous for its sheep and kangaroos (袋鼠).After a short drive from any town,you will find yourself in the middle of white sheep,sheep,everywhere are sheep.Have you seen a kangaroo?It has a ―bag‖ in its body.The mother kangaroo keeps its baby kangaroo in the ―bag‖.It is very interesting,isn‘t it?


( )1.China is larger than Australia.

( )2.Australia is an island country.

( )3.The population of Australia is as large as that of China.

( )4.Kangaroos are small animals like mouse in our house.

( )5.Kangaroos always carry bags on their backs.


Unit 8 I’d like some noodles.

【1】①would like+名词/不定式(to+V)想要某物;想做某事

I'd like some cakes.我想吃蛋糕。Tom would like to go swimming.汤姆想去游泳。

②would you like sth?(你想要某物吗?)也是日常生活中用来征求对方许可的一种委婉、礼貌的句型,起肯定回答为Yes,please,否定回答为No,thanks。

Would you like a cup of tea?你想来杯茶吗?Yes,please./ No,thanks.好的。/不,谢谢。

③would you like to+V?(你想要某物吗?)是向对方提出建议或邀请的句型,起肯定回答为Yes,I'd like to.或Yes,I'd love to.否定回答为Sorry。

和我们一起打篮球,好吗?_____you _____ _____play basketball with us? 好的,我愿意。Yes,I'd ________ .

【2】What kind of noodles/dumplings would you like?用来询问对方喜欢哪种面条或水饺;

What kind of noodles would you like? Beef noodles,please.

【3】What size bowl of noodles/dumplings would you like?用来询问对方要哪种型号碗的面条或水饺 What size bowl of noodles would he like? He'd like a small/medium/large bowl of noodles.



②以辅音字母+y结尾的名词,先变y为i,再class加es。例如:family- families,dictionary- dictionaries; ③在以s,sh,ch,x结尾的名词后加es。例如:Class- Classes,watch(手表)-watches;



( )1. There are some __________ _____________ grass on the hill.

A. sheeps , eats B. sheep, eats C. sheep eating D. sheeps, eating

( )2. When the autumn comes , _________drop on the earth. A. leafs B. leaf C. leaves D. leef



( ) 1. — What kind of pizza would you like? —I‘d like a _____ pizza.

A. mushroom and tomato B. mushroom and tomato‘s C. mushrooms and tomatoes D. mushroom and tomatoes

( ) 2. I‘d like _____ a glass of orange juice. A. have B. eat C. drink D. to have

( ) 3. — Would you like _____ pizzas? — He would like a _____ pizza.

A. mushroom B. cheese C. olive D. medium

( ) 4. — What size pizza would he like? — Yes, please. A. eat B. have C. some D. any

( ) 5. —_____ can you see on the plate? —three pieces of bread.

A. How many bread B. How many breads C. How much bread D. How much breads

( ) 6. — Would you like a pizza with mushrooms? —_____

A. No, thanks. B. Yes ,I would. C. No, please. D. No, I don‘t.

( ) 7. The coffee _____ in the cup and hot dogs _____ on the plate.

A. is…are B. are…is C. is…is D. are…are

( ) 8. — Would you like hamburgers _____ hot dogs? — Hot dogs.

A. and B. or C. as well D. too

( ) 9. We also have great salad _____ aoda and iced tea.

A. also B. or C. too D. as well as

( ) 10. — What about something to _____ ? — Some juice, please.

A. eat B. drink C. want D. have


A: Hi. Can I h__(1)__ you? B: Yes, p__(2)__. I‘d like a l__(3)__ pizza.

A: What would you like o__(4)__ it? B: Cheese, t__(5)__ , and pepperoni.

A: Ok, do you want any d__(6)__? B: Yes, please, a soda and an o__(7)__ juice.

A: A __(8)__ else? B: I‘d like a salad. How m__(9)__ are they?

A: They are twenty-five d__(10)__. B: Here is the money.

A: Thank you. Goodbye. B: Bye!

1、 2、、4、5、



A hot dog is one of the most popular American foods. It was named after frankfurter, a German food.

You may hear ―hot dog‖ __1__ in other ways. People sometimes say ―hot dog‖ to express __2__. For

example(例如), a

friend may ask __3__ you would like to go to cinema. You might say, ―Great! I would love to 46

go.‖ Or, you could say, ―__4__! I would love to go.‖

People __5__ use the expression to describe(描述) someone who is a ―show-off‖, who tries to show everyone

else how __6__ he is. You often hear such __7__ called a ―hot dog‖. He may be a baseball player for example,

who __8__ the ball with one hand, making a (n) __9__ catch seem more difficult. You know he is a hot dog

because when he makes such a catch, he bows(鞠躬) crowd, hoping to win their __10__.

( ) 1. A. eaten B. used C. cooked D. picked

( ) 2. A. strength B. practice C. pleasure D. reply

( ) 3. A. if B. how C. when D. where

( ) 4. A. Hot dog B. Don‘t worry C. Never mind D. Excuse me

( ) 5. A. ever B. also C. still D. yet

( ) 6. A. hopeful B. careful C. kind D. great

( ) 7. A. a dog B. a hand C. a person D. an action

( ) 8. A. catches B. plays C. kind D. great

( ) 9. A. hard B. funny C. exciting D. easy

( ) 10. A. thanks B. cheers C. medals D. matches


Happy children‘s day!

Come and see the Indian elephants and the tigers from America. The bears are waiting to meet you, and the

monkeys from Thailand are waiting to throw things at you. The lovely dogs from Australia are waiting to laugh

at you, and the giraffes from Zambia are waiting to look down on you.

Tickets: Time

Adults: ¥60 June1-June2

Children: free 9:00 a.m. -7:00 p.m.

Keep the park clean!

Do not touch, give foot or go near the animals.

( ) 1. How many kinds of animals are talked about in the poster(海报)?A. 4 B. 5 C. 6 D. 7

( ) 2. Mr. and Mrs. Brown will take their twins aged 6 to the park. How much will the tickets be together?

A.¥60 B.¥120 C.¥180 D.¥240

( ) 3. Visitors can do the following things EXCEPT_____.

A. giving some food to the tigers B. watching the bears playing games

C. laughing at the dogs from Australia D. taking some pictures

( ) 4. From the passage we can guess the animal ―giraffe‖ must be ___.

A. long B. fat C. tall D. strong

( ) 5. The poster may be made just _____.

A. on New Year‘s Day B. on Christmas Day C. after Children‘s Day D. before Children‘s Day



(提示词:pizza, small, cheese, green peppers(辣椒), size, address, phone number, eight dollars, deliver)

A: Can I help you? B:__________________________________


A:______________________________ B:________________________________

A:____________________________ B:_______________________________


Unit 9 How was your weekend?



如:yesterday,last night/year,once,in 1990,two days ago等。也可表示过去经常或反复发生的动作,常与


①I got up at 6:30 yesterday.昨天我在六点半起床。

②She was a middle school student in 2000.在二零零年她是一个中学生。

③He always went to school by bus last year.去年他总是乘公共汽车去上学。







肯定句句型:主语+动词过去式。例如:①I watched the film two days ago.两天前我看了这部电影。 ②Mary was a doctor in 2001.在2001年玛丽是一名医生。

③The students played basketball yesterday.昨天学生们打篮球了。

④She bought a notebook last week.上个星期她买了一个笔记本。

否定句句型:①主语+wasn't/weren't+其他②主语+ didn't+动词原形。以上四句的否定句依次为: ①I didn't watch the film two days ago.两天前我没有看这部电影。

②Mary wasn't a doctor in 2001.在2001年玛丽不是一名医生。

③The students didn't play basketball yesterday.昨天学生们没有打篮球了。

④She didn't buy a notebook last week.上个星期她没买笔记本。

一般疑问句句型:①Was/Were+主语+其他②Did+主语+动词原形。以上四句的一般疑问句依次为: ①Did you watch the film two days ago?两天前我看这部电影了吗?yes,I did. NO,I didn't.

②Was Mary a docter in 2001?在2001年玛丽是一名医生吗?Yes,she was.No,she wasn't.

③Did the students play basketball yesterday? yes,they did. NO, they didn't.

④Did she buy a notebook last week?上个星期她买笔记本了吗?yes,she did. No,she didn't.

【2】 ―What about …?‖在英语中与―How about …?‖含义相同,两者均表示―…怎么样?‖后面可以接名词、代词或动词+ing形式,用来询问信息,提出建议或征询意见。

What about this sweater? (名词)这件毛衣怎么样?( 征询意见) How about playing soccer?(动词)踢足球怎么样?(提出建议)

I went to the movies. What about you?(代词)我去看电影。你干什么?(询问信息)

【3】在具体哪一天的上午、下午或晚上要用on,例如:on Sunday morning

【4】watch sb do sth 意为―看到某人做某事‖。例如:Tom's mother often watches him do homework.汤姆的妈妈常常看他做家庭作业。

【5】It is/was time to+V意为―该干……了;是干……的时候了‖ 。

是该睡觉的时候了。It is time ____ _____ _____ bed.

注意:如果要表示―该某人做某事‖时,应在to的前面加上for sb,即It is/was time for sb to+V

我们该吃晚饭了。It is time ____ _____ ______ _______ dinner.

【6】look for…… 寻找……, find 找到

I can‘t _____ my English book. I _____ ____ everywhere, but I can‘t _____ it yet.



( )1.What time ___ you ___ home last Friday?

A. did; get to B. did; reach C. do; reached D. are; getting

( )2. ―Who cooked supper today?‖ ―I ______‖ A. did B. does C. was D. is

( )3. do you think everyone enjoys _____ soccer? A. play B. do C. playing D.plays

( )4. ―Did Tom help his parents at home?‖ ― ___________.‖

A. Yes, he does B. No, he wasn‘t C. Yes, he was D. No, he idin‘t

( )5. Did you ____ a movie yesterday evening? A. watched B. see C. saw D. looked

( )6. Tom _____ watch TV after supper _______ last night?

A. wasn‘t; on B. didn‘t‘; on C. doesn‘t; in D. didn‘t; /

( )7. China _________ the WTO in 2001. A. join B. joins C. joined D. joining

( )8. ―_____________?‖ ― He went to the library.‖

A. Where did you go B. Where did he live C. How was he D. Did he go to the library

( )9. John didn‘t go to school ___ he was ill(病). A. because B. so C. but D. why

( )10. I had __________ to do last night.

A. a lot of works B. some works C. many works D. a lot of work

( )11. Carol went shopping ________Friday afternoon. A. in B. at C. on D. to

( )12. The old man _____ on the sofa and read a book. A. sit B. sat C. sits D. sitting

( )13. We have two new students ______ names are Tom and mike.

A. They B. Them C. Their D. Theirs

( )14. Mary _______ her summer vacation in Shenzhen. A. took B, spent C. did D. went

( )15. ― I like playing tennis. _____________?‖ ―I like it, too.‖

A. What do you want B. What about you C. How do you like it D. Do you like swimming



Last month, Tony ________ (have) a very busy weekend. On Saturday morning, He__________ (clean) his room. In the afternoon, he ______(do) his homework.. It__________ (be) very easy, so it _________(take) him only half an hour. In the evening, he __________(visit) his friends, he ______(have) a good supper that evening. On Sunday morning, he _________(get) up very late. Then he _________(read) a book about Chinese history. In the afternoon, he ________(go) to see an interesting movie.



A little boy came to a new town with his parents. His name I s Peter. His family is very rich(富有). They had a driver(司机) and they had a cook, and a lot of servants(仆人).

Peter is going to a new school. On the first day his mother said to him, ―Peter, be modest at your new school. Don‘t say we are rich.‖ And Peter said, ―Yes, Mommy.‖ So Peter went to school. The first class was composition(作文). The subject of the composition was My Family.

―My name is Peter. My family is very poor(贫穷). Both my father and my mother are very poor. Our driver is very poor and the cook is poor, the other servants are poor…‖

( )1. Who did Peter live with? A. The driver B. The cook C.The servants D.His father and mother

( )2.How is Peter‘s family? A. Very poor B. Very rich C. Very big D. Very friendly

( )3. When did Peter‘s mother tell him not to say ―We are rich.‖

A. Before going to a new town B. On the first day he went to a new school

C. In the composition class D. After school

( )4. Guess! What‘s ―be modest‖ in Chinese? A. 贫困 B. 小心 C. 自信 D. 谦虚

( )5. According to (根据) Peter‘s composition, you know _______.

A. Peter‘s family is very poor B. Peter has a car in his family

C. Peter‘s father is a cook D. Peter‘s composition is good


The old name for films was ―moving pictures‖ in America. They still call them ―movies‖ and they say, ―Shall we go to the movies?‖ when we would say ―Shall we go to the cinema(电影院)?‖

Then one day, a boy said to his friend, ―Do you like moving pictures?‖ the friend thought that the boy was going to invite (邀请) him to go to the cinema, so he said, ―Yes, please. I like moving pictures very much.‖

―Good,‖ said the first boy. ―My father has a picture shop. He sells pictures. This evening I have to move (移动)fifty heavy boxes of pictures from one place to another. You like moving pictures, so I‘m sure you enjoy the pictures with me.‖

( )6. ―Moving pictures‖ was the old name ______________.

A. for cinema B. for films C. for America D. for carrying movies

( )7._________ still call films ―movies‖ today.

A. The boys B. The British C. The Americans D. Young people

( )8. When the boy said to his friend, ― Do you like moving pictures?‖ he meant ―_______________‖

A. Do you like to go to the cinema with me? B. Do you like to see the film?

C. Do you like to help me move the pictures? D. Do you like old films?

( )9. The boy‘s friend _____________.

A. liked seeing films very much B. liked to move pictures very much

C. was always ready to help others D. liked to help people move something

( )10. The job of the boy‘s father was to _____________.

A. show films B. make films C. sell pictures D. draw pictures

Unit 10 Where did you go on vacation?

【1】stay at home呆在家里 go to summer camp去夏令营 go on vacation度假


他对我们都很友好。He is ______ ______ us all.

【2】have fun +V ing ―做某事很有乐趣‖。他们每天打排球很有乐趣。They ___ ___ ____basketball every day.

【3】find +人/物+Ving:发现某人/某物正在做… 。

我发现他们正在游泳池里游泳。I found ______ __________ in the pool.

【4】be lost―丢失的,迷路的‖ 。昨天他们在森林里迷路了.They _______ ______ in the forest yesterday. 上个星期天她的钢笔丢失了。His pen ____________

_______ last Sunday.


【5】help 人(to)+V:帮助某人做某事(注意:有时该用法可以和―help sb with sth ‖互换)

Lily often helps (to) us study English. 莉莉经常帮助我们学英语。=Lily often helps us with English.

【6】make sb do sth 让/使某人做某事

我们的妈妈经常让我们按时睡觉。Our mother often _____ ________ ______to bed on time(按时).

【7】decide to do sth 决定做某事 They __ ____ ___to summer camp.他们决定去夏令营。



( )1. Tina likes _______and _________.

A. to sing, dancing B. to sing, dance C. sings ,dances D singing, dancing.

( )2. Did they _______ her grandma last Sunday? A. visit B. visited C. visits D. visiting

( )3. What _____ she like?----She is a little bit smart. A. does B. is C. did D. does look

( )4. Who is the girl _____ long hair? A. has B. have C. with D. is

( )5. ______ May Day vacation_______?---Not bad.

A. What‘s/going B. How‘s /going C. What/ going D. How/going

( )6. Thank you for ___ CCTV‘s Around The World A. joining B. to join C. join D. joins

( )7. Where are the children _______ now? A. play B. plays C. played D. playing

( )8. I found a boy ______in the corner. A. crying B. cry C. to cry D. cries

( )9. How _______ the people in the museum? They ______ friendly

A. was/was B. were/were C. was/is D. were/are

( )10. We decided___ at home on the raining day. A. stay B. stayed C. staying D. to stay

( )11. Some boys are taking ___now. A. photo B. photoes C. photos D. much photos

( )12. We can learn ________ history from the Pyramids(金字塔)

A. five thousands B. five thousand C. five thousand of D. five thousands of

( )13. It is ________. You had better(最好) put on your warm clothes.

A. cool B. hot C. warm D. cold

( )14. My father is very friendly______ me and never angry(生气)____me.

A .to/to B to /for C with/to. D to/with

( )15. When it is winter in Xiamen, it is _______in Australia.

A. spring B. summer C. autumn D. winter.

( )16. My sister went to the post office and ______ a letter _____ yesterday afternoon.

A . posted/* B. posts /in C. posted/ on D posted/at

( )17. It is eight o‘clock now. The students ______ an English class.

A. is having B. have C. are having D. had

( )18. ________the weather like in Beijing today?----It is hot.

A. How B. How‘s C. What D. What‘s

( )19. I like ______ cold weather. Because we can ________.

A. a/go swimming B. */ go swimming C. a/ skating D. */ go skating.

( )20. My teacher often ______ interesting stories to the students.

A. say B. speak C. talks D. tells

Unit 11 What do you think of game shows?

【1】What do you think of…?表示―你认为…怎么样?‖主要用语询问对方对某物/某事的看法。回答常有:I love/like it.我喜欢。I don't mind it.我不介意。I don't love/like it.我不喜欢。I can't stand it.我不能忍受。 你认为这部电影怎么样? What ___ you _____ ____ the film? I love/like it.我喜欢。

【2】We are talking to Alan,a thirteen-year-old boy.

①―are talking to Alan‖是现在进行时表示将来的动作, 这种情况多用于go,come,leave,arrive等表示动作来去的动词,例如:He is leaving tomorrow.明天他将离开。

②a thirteen-year-old boy是一个名词短语,意为―一个十三岁的男孩‖在thirteen-year-old中,名词year要用单数,而且中间有连字符―—‖,这种结构常做定语。She is a fifteen-year-old student.她是一个十五岁的学生。

【3】agree with sb意为―同意某人的意见、主意或所说的事‖,with后常接表示人的名词。I agree with you.

【4】show sb sth=show sth to sb给某人看某物 。能给我看看你的新围巾吗?Can you___ ___ ___ ___ ____ ?= Can you _______ _______ ________ _______ ____

me ?


【5】ask sb about sth 关于某时询问某人 Yesterday I asked students about pop music.昨天我就流行音乐问了几个同学。




1. He is ______________ (wear) a pair of sunglasses today.

2. He ______________ (not mind) the watch, but he likes wallet.

3. Thank you for _________________ (join) our country group!

4. ______________ (not talk) to others when you are having classes.

5. I enjoyed_______________ (read) your article in the school magazine.


( ) 1. —Can you please _____ me another book? —Certainly. Here you are.

A. show B. to show C. shows D. showing

( ) 2. — What he did made me _____ unhappy. —Oh, really? What did he do?

A. feel B. feels C. to feel D. feeling

( ) 3. — What does she think of the key ring? — She ___ it, but ___ no money to buy it.

A. like...have B. likes...has C. mind...has D. has...hasn‘t

( ) 4. — What do you like doing? —I enjoy _____ at home and _____ TV .

A. stay...watch B. staying...watching C. to stay...to watch D. staying...to watch

( ) 5. — Do you have ___ money on you? — Let me see. Here __ a little money in the wallet.

A. any...has B. some...is C. much...are D. many...have

( ) 6. — What do you think of __ he did? —I think he has no right ___ it like that.

A. what...to do B. where...to do C. how...doing D. when...doing

( ) 7. —_____ she have breakfast this morning? — No. She left home _____ breakfast.

A. Do...with B. Does...for C. Does...without D. Did...without

( ) 8. — What _____ you do list night? — Some of us _____ to the party.

A. do...go B. did...went C. can...goes D. are...go

( ) 9. —_____ do you wear colorful clothes? —_____ I want to be young and beautiful.

A. When...Because B. Why...Because C. Where...When D. How...So

( ) 10. — Did you mind my _____ the door?— No, I don‘t. You can do it as you like.

A. close B. to close C. closing D. closeing


The Pope (教皇) arrived at Heathrow airport (飞机场) and got straight into a car. ―I‘m, rather __1__ for a very important meeting, my good man,‖ he told the driver.

―Please go as fast as possible.‖ The driver agreed, __2__ he couldn‘t do more than 100 kilometers an hour on that road. The Pope kept asking the driver to go faster, but he failed. It made him __3__.

Then the Pope said, ―look. I really __4__ get to this meeting. It‘s very important. You sit __5__ and I‘ll drive.‖ Being a good Catholic lad (天主教皇), the driver felt he should do __6__ he told him. So they changed their __7__ and went on. The Pope really put his __8__ down and they were doing well over 160 kilometers an hour. But a few kilometers down the road they got pulled over by the police.

A policeman came over to the car. Looked in and then walked away to call his chief (长官)。 ―Chief, Chief,‖ he said into his radio, ―I might have just stopped__9__ really, really important.‖

― Is it the prime minister (首相)?‖ asked the chief.

―No,‖ said the policeman, ―More important than him.‖

―Well, is it the Queen (女王)?‖ asked the chief.

―No, sir,‖ answered the policeman, ―More important than her.‖

―Well, who is it then?‖ asked the chief.

―I don‘t know, sir,‖ said the policeman, ―But he has got the Pope _10__ him around.‖

( ) 1. A. waiting B. busy C. tired D. late

( ) 2. A. and B. so C. but D. or

( ) 3. A. pleased B. afraid C. alone D. worried

( ) 4. A. can B. have to C. mustn‘t D. may

( ) 5. A. in the back B. in the front C. on the floor D. in the car

( ) 6. A. when B. like C. how D. as

( ) 7. A. cars B. clothes C. places D. minds

( ) 8. A. hand B. foot C. bag D. key

( ) 9. A. someone B. anybody C. two persons D. some people

( ) 10. A. looking B. walking C. driving D. turning



―Come and have dinner with me on Thursday,‖ says john.

―But I don‘t know where your house is,‖ says Henry.

―It‘s easy,‖ john. ―There is no problem. You get off the bus. Then, you cross the street. You take the first on the left, and you walk for five minutes. Then you come to a big tree about a hundred meters down this street, and there is a big red house. You go past the big red house. And after five hundred meters, you see a small yellow house near a little tree. Open the door with your foot.‖

―With my foot?‖ says Henry.

―Why, yes‖ says john, ―your hands will be full.‖

―How do you now my hands will be full?‖ says Henry.

―You wouldn‘t come to my house without some food with you‖.

( ) 1. John‘s house is _____. A. a big red house B. a small yellow house C. near a big tree

( ) 2. Why does john want Henry to open the door with foot? Because _____?

A. John invites Henry to have dinner with him B. There is something wrong Henry‘s hands

C. John thinks that when Henry comes, his hands will be full

( ) 3. When Henry gets off the bus, _____.

A. he can go straight to john‘s house B. he can see a big tree near john‘s house C. he still can‘t see john‘s house

( ) 4. John expects Henry‘s hands will be full of _____. A. food B. wine C. gifts

( ) 5. In the story(故事), ―you take the first on the left‖ mean _____.

A. You take No.1 bus on the left B. You take the first turn on the left C. You take the first step in the left




Unit 12 Don’t eat in class

【1】have to与must的区别: (二者后面必须跟动词原形)

⑴have to(必须,不得不),是外在原因而不得不那样做,重点强调客观因素。

I have to get up at 6:00am.我不得不在六点钟起床。

She has to finish the work today.她今天不得不完成这项工作。


Do you have to get up at 6:00am?Yes,I do. /No, I don‘t.

Does she has to finish the work today? Yes,she does.No,she doesn't.

⑵must(必须),是说话者自己认为必须那样做,重点强调主观因素。起否定形式为mustn't,意为―不必…‖。 ①I must do my homework every day.我必须每天做家庭作业。

②Tom must buy a pen for his brother. 汤姆必须给他弟弟买一枝钢笔。

肯定句变成否定句,需要在must后加not(must not=mustn't)。因此,以上两句的否定句为:

①I mustn't do my homework every day.

②Tom mustn't buy a pen for his brother.

【2】can―能,会;可以‖,其否定形式为can't―不能,不会;不可以‖。(二者后面必须跟动词原形)。例如:We can't arrive late for class.

(p75,3a)too many意为―太多‖,后面跟可数名词复数;too much意为―太多‖,后面跟不可数名词。例如:There are too many flowers in the garden.花园里的花太多了。

I have too much homework this evening.( homework为不可数名词)今晚我的家庭作业太多了。

【3】by―到(某时)之前,不迟于‖You must go to bed by ten o'clock.你必须在十点前睡觉。

1. What‘s the matter with you? I have a sore throat.

What‘s the matter= What‘s the trouble?=What‘s wrong?=What‘s up?

There‘s something wrong with…

have a sore throat, have a sore back, have a sore leg

have a cough, have a cold, have a fever, have a toothache, have a stomachache have a headache

2. It‘s easy to have a healthy lifestyle, and it‘s important to eat a balanced diet.

【4】It‘s + adj. + to do sth. 做某事……

【5】 How do you get to school? I usually walk ,but sometimes I take the bus.



take + 限定词+ 交通工具+ to + 某地 go/get to + 某地 + by + 交通工具单数

go/get to + 某地 + in/on + 限定词+ 交通工具 walk/ride/drive/fly to + 某地



1.You must not break these (规定).

2.We can‘t make too much noise in the (大厅走廊).

3.We have to wear 运动鞋) for gym class.

4.She ________________ (洗) the dishes after meals every day.

5. You should 6. Don‘t talk (loud) here.

7. Shall we gate(门口)?

8.This famous singer (write) a book about his life last year

She has to wash the dishes after dinner, then she can watch TV usually reads at night. She has to be in bed her guitar every day. She doesn‘t think she‘s . 三、汉译英

1.外面很冷,你必须穿大衣。It‘s cold outside. You 2.你必须到十一点上床睡觉吗?Do you have to 11:00?

3.我们班级有太多规定。There are in our class.

4.你认为你的英语课怎么样?What do you 5.我们不能在教室里吃东西。We can‘t in the .


( )1.In our school, we don‘t have to _____ the uniforms. A. wear B put on C. have on D. dress

( )2.--- June looks unhappy, what‘s wrong? ---- She can‘t watch TV ____ school nights.

A. in B. on C. at D.\

( )3 . As students, we can‘t ____ late for class. A. get to B. arrive at C. arrive D. a arrive in

( )4.My teacher says students can‘t ______ music in the classroom.

A. listen to B. hear to C. listen D. hear

( )5.Tony doesn‘t feel relaxed because there are too ___ rules at the school.

A. much B. many C. lots of D. some

( )6. I have to go to bed _____ 10 o‘clock. A. to B. by C. on D. in

( )7.---Look at the sign there, what does it mean?

--- Don‘t _____ swimming, it‘s dangerous. A. going B. go C. went D. goes

( )8. ---John, don‘t _____ after school. --- Sorry, Mum.

A. watching TV B. watches TV C. to watch TV D. watch TV

( )9. You can‘t eat______ outside. A. \ B. at C. in D. on

( )10.--- Do I have to_____ early in the morning, Dad? ---- Sure.

A. to get up B. get up C. go to bed D . goes to bed

( )11.When did the visitors _______ Beijing? Three days ago.

A. arrive B. arrive at C. get to

D. get

( )12.The good news made me _______ really happy. A. think B. felt C. feels D. feel

2. —Who is the talk show now? —My uncle.

in the dining hall.

4. They want to 5. My grandfather often a walk after supper.

show, go, have a rest, do some reading, see, buy, speak

1. If you practice _________________ English every day, you can do very well in English.

2. He put on his shirt and __________________ to school.

3.We are too tired. Let‘s stop ________________.

4.Mike sometimes __________________ in the morning. He thinks reading is very interesting.

5.Kate ____________________ me some of her photos yesterday.


6. I ___________________ a cat run away just now.

7.Look! Some people _____________________ food in the supermarket now.


Who's Peanut? In the story "Peanut", she's a small dog. But there's something special (特殊): the dog has a big interest in smells (嗅觉)! Peanut likes to smell everything she can find. She even enjoys bad smells - like those from a cat, trash bag or diapers (尿布)!One day, she goes to a store with her owner (主人), Nina. Nina puts Peanut in her backpack. She likes the dog so much that she treats it as a baby.But, Tad, the toddler (刚学步的小孩) in the family, gets lost in the store. Could Peanut's nose help find the baby? Will he become a big hero? You have to read the book to see."Peanut" is full of bright, funny pictures. It brings the dog to life. It's great for beginners in English!Other easy books in "Stepping into Reading" also can take kids on a great reading trip!

( )1. ____ is a dog. A.Peanut B. Nina C. Tad

( )2. Peanut likes to ____. A. eat a lot of food B. smell things C. catch things

( )3. Tad gets lost ____. A. in the store B. on the street C. on a bus

( )4. _______books can take kids on a great reading trip.

A.Peanut B.Stepping into Reading C.Peanut and Stepping into Reading

( )5. The story mainly tells us________

A. how Peanut helps find the lost baby B. about an interesting book C. Peanut and Nina are good friends

八年级(上)英语 Unit 1: How often do you exercise?

【1】 How often do you exercise? 你(你们)多久锻炼一次身体?

How often + 助动词do(does或did) + 主语 + do sth.? 疑问词how often是问频率(多久一次),(在这里助动词do(does或did) 是起帮助构成疑问的作用)与一般现在时或一般过去时连用,回答一般是用表示频率的副词,如:once, twice, three times…, sometimes, often, quite, often, never, every day, once a week , twice a month , three times a month , three or four times a month 等。

翻译:―你们多久到工厂去一次?‖―每星期两次。‖ (―How often do you go to the factory?‖ ―Twice a week. ‖) ―他们多长时间举办一次舞会?‖―通常每两周举办一次。‖

(―How often do they have a dancing party?‖ ―Usually, once every other week.‖)

―他多久去购一次物?‖―一个月一次。‖ (―How often does he go shopping?‖ ―He goes shopping once a month.‖)

How long的回答是―for+時段‖。How soon的回答是―in+時段‖。How many times回答是次数。How far 回答是距离。


1.-How soon do you go to school? -I go to school twice a week.

2. -How often will she start to run? - I will start to run in five minutes.

3. –How far do you have the bike? -I have the bike for two month.

【2】 As for homework , most students do homework every day .

as for...意思是―至于;关于‖,常用于句首作状语,其后跟名词、代词或动词的-ing形式(即动名词)。如: As for him,I never want to see him here. 至于他,我永远不希望在这里见到。

As for the story,you'd better not believe it. 关于那故事,你最好不要相信。

翻译:至于我自己,我现在不想去。 (As for myself, I don‘t want to go now. )

至于那个人,我什么都不知道。(As for the man, I know nothing about him.)

【3】 Mom wants me to get up at 6:00 and play ping-pong with her .

want to do sth. 意思是―想要做某事‖; want sb. to do sth.意思是―想要某人做某事‖。如:

Do you want to go to the movies with me?你想和我一起去看电影吗?

The teacher doesn't want us to eat hamburgers.老师不想让我们吃汉堡包。



2. He wants 3. I want my father ( be) healthy every day.

4. She often helps her mother (do) the housework.

【4】She says it‘s good for my health.

be good for...表示―对……有益(有好处)‖;其反义为:be bad for...。(这里for 是介词,后跟名词、代词或动名词)如:It's good for us to do more reading. 多读书对我们有好处。


Reading in bed is bad for your eyes.在床上读书对你的眼睛有害。

【5】I try to eat a lot of vegetables , usually ten to eleven times a week .

try to do sth.表示― 尽力做某事 ‖ ,不包含是否成功的意思而try doing sth.表示―(用某一办法)试着去做某事‖。如: You‘d better try doing the experiment in another way. 你最好试试用另一种方法做这个试验。

【6】 My healthy lifestyle helps me get good grades. help sb.(to) do sth.帮助某人做某事

【7】Good food and exercise help me to study better.


【8】 Is her lifestyle the same as yours or different?

=Is her lifestyle the same as your lifestyle or is her lifestyle different from yours? be the same as … / be different from …

【9】A lot of vegetables help you to keep in good health .

keep in good health = keep healthy = stay healthy

【10】 You must try to eat less meat .

try to do sth.表示― 尽力做某事 ‖ ,不包含是否成功的意思,less是little的比较级

【11】 That sounds interesting.




It tastes good. 这味道好。

The music sounds very sweet. 这音乐听起来很入耳。

The smoke grew heavier and heavier. 烟雾变得越来越浓了。

【12】drink,eat, take, have的辨析

Drink动词是喝,名词为饮料。Eat 一般用于吃固体食物,但可用于―喝汤‖。Take 但一般用于吃药。 Have 常用于吃一日三餐。

用drink, eat, take, have填空:

1.I‘m thirsty , I want water.

2. I‘m hungry, I want some bread.

3.Please a cup of milk every evening.

4. I often lunch at school.

5. I would like to some egg soup.

6. My doctor asked me to medicine after meals.

【13】 maybe / may be

maybe 是副词,意为―大概, 可能,或许‖,一般用于句首。May be是情态动词,意为―可能是..,也许是..,大概是..‖.

1. The baby is crying she is hungry.

2. The woman a teacher .

2. There is time left, I don‘t catch the first bus.

3. Could you give me milk?

【15】 none / no one

none指人或物,强调数量,用how many提问,常与of连用。no one 多指人,强调―无人‖这种状态,用who提问,不可与of连用,作主语时,其谓语动词用第三人称单数形式。

1、 2、is in the classroom.

【16】hard / hardly


1. The ground is too to dig

2. I can understand them.

3. It‘s raining ,the people can go outside.

【17】It‘s adj+ (for sb.) +to do sth. 对(某人来说)做某事是怎样的。



1.Taking exercise is (好处)for her health.

2. (吃) too much meat is bad for our health.

3. (听) to music (是) relaxing.

【18】kind of 有点儿,修饰形容词、副词,与之相一致有还有a little, a bit.另外与kind构成的短语还有:a kind of, all kinds of


1. She is a kind of short.

2. He has kind of tired , he wants to have a rest.

3. His brother is a kind thin.

4. Her aunt is a bit of outgoing.

5.What kind noodles do you like?

【19】must与have to 的区别:


Have to是客观上―不得不‖,有时态及人称的变化。

如:She must work hard. It‘s raining, Tom has to stay at home.



You try vegetables.


It‘s too late , Lucy to school.


She was too tired, she yesterday afternoon.


I. 词汇。

A) 根据句意,用括号内所给词的适当形式填空。

1. My mother goes to Beijing__________(two) a year.

2. Can you find the__________(different) between this box and that box?

3. I__________(hard) ever see him now.

4. Do you want to go ______________(skateboard) with me?

5. You should look after your _____________ (healthy).

B) 根据句意及首字母提示,完成下列单词拼写。

6. Do you like drinking m__________?

7. E_________________ every day is good for us..

8. I'm a student. I'm in Class One, G__________ One.

9. Do you often eat j_________ food?

10. My favorite p__________ is the CCTV news.


2. How__________ do you go to the movies?

3. It__________ rains here. It's usually sunny and warm.

4. Some boys hardly ever eat junk food, but most of them eat junk food __________.

5. I can't swim. So I__________ go swimming. I only run on the beach.

三. 选择填空。

( )1.- ________ students in your class are from Beijing? -Only one.

A. How often B. How many C. How much D. How

( )2.- ________do your grandparents come to see you? -Twice a week.

A. How often B. How many C. When D. How

( )3. What ___ she __ on weekends? A.is, do B.does, does C.do, do D.does, do

( )4. Most students in my class ________exercise every day.

A. does B. do C. is doing D. are doing

( )5. Although he is very old, ___he works very hard. A. and B. but C. / D. so

( )6. The old man is well because he often____. A. exercises B. drinks C. sleeps D. plays

( )7. Lily usually ________ her friends _________ their English.

A. helps;with B. helps;studying C.helps;to D.helps: /

( )8. Please try to have more fruit, ______ you‘d like to keep in good health.


A. and B. so C. if D. as for

( )9. He‘s a very lazy student, as a result, he always gets _______ grades.

A. a good B. high C. terrible D. an awful

( )10. Is her telephone number 87605904? _________________.

A. That‘s all right. B. Yes, she is. C. All right. D. Of course

五. 完形填空。

We're in Grade Eight this year. but Han Mei says she can_____5_____ me. I think I can____6_____ it better. help her.

( )1. A. see B. watch C. find D. look

( )2. A. do B. see C. look D. sound

( )3. A. a lot B. some C. lot D. much

( )4. A. well B. good C. bad D. nice

( )5. A. learn B. give C. help D. need

( )6. A. do B. play C. look D. feel

( )7. A. either B. very C. much D. too

( )8. A. am afraid B. think C. am sorry D. want

( )9. A. doesn't B. don't C. does D. do

( )10. A. gives B. calls C. asks D. tells

六. 阅读理解。

Some family names come from colors in English. We know some family names like Green, White, Black,

Blue and Brown. Mr. Wu has three foreign(外国的) friends. They are Mr. Green, Mr. White and Mr. Brown.

They all work in Beijing now.

Mr. Green‘s name is Jeff Green. He is an English teacher at No. 4 Middle School. His wife is Helen Green.

They are English. they have two children. Jim is their son and Kate is their daughter. Li Lei and Lin Tao are

Jim‘s classmates. They are in Class3, Grade1. their English teacher is Miss Gao. Jim has a bird and its name is


Mr. White is an American. His wife is Joan. They have three children——two daughters and a son. Jane

White is fifteen. Emma White is twelve. They are middle school students. Their brother Bob is only nine. He is a

student, too. Look, Jane is in a red sweater. Emma is in an orange hat and Bob is in a black coat.

Mr. Brown is an American, too. Jack Brown is his only child. He is twelve years old. Emma White is his

classmate. Mr. Wu is their English teacher. They are in Class2, Grade1. They have many Chinese friends.

( )1. Mr. Wu has foreign friends. A. five B. four C. three D. two

( )2. is Mr. Green‘s name.

A. Jeff Green B. Helen Green C. Jim Green D. Kate Green

( )3. Li Lei, Lin Tao and Jim are in A. class 2, grade 1 B. class 3, grade 1 C. Class 2, Grade 1 D. Class 3, Grade 1

( ) 4. Mr. White has three children. Their names are

A Jim, Kate and Mary B. Jane, Emma and Bob C. Helen, Jane and Emma D. Jane, Kate and Jack

( )5. is Jack‘s English teacher.

A. Miss. Gao B. Mr. Wu C. Mr. Green D. Mr. White

Unit 2 What’s the matter?

【1】 What‘s the matter? I have a bad cold. 你怎么了?我得了重感冒。

What‘s the matter with sth./ sb.某物或某人怎么啦?

( ) 1. – I‘m sorry to keep you waiting so long. - .

A. Don‘t say so B. I don‘t think so C. I‘d love to D. It doesn‘t matter

( ) 2. There is nothing with her TV. A. wrong B. mattering C. the wrong D. mattering

( ) 3. -- - Nothing serious , but a bit tired. –better have a rest now , dear.

A. Is that all B. Is there anything else C. What‘s this D. What‘s the matter with you


1.主语+have/ has +a +….. ache/生病的名词。如:

I have a high fever /toothache.


2.主语+have/ has a sore +发病部位。如:She has a sore back.她背疼。

3.Something is wrong with +one‘s 部位=There is something wrong with+ one‘ 部位。


1. 昨天我手臂疼。

2. 我的胃不舒服。

3. 你怎么了?我感冒了。4. 她的脖子怎么了?她的脖子疼。

5. 他的喉咙疼。


主语+should/ shouldn‘t +动词原形+ 其他。

如:-I have a toothache. 我牙疼。 – You should see a dentist.你应该去看牙医。

A: ? B: I‘m not feeling . I have a toothache.

A: When start? .

A:OH, that‘s too bad.. B: Yes, I think so.

A: B: Thanks.

【4】believe +名词(代词)或句子 相信……

Need sth. To do sth. 需要某物来做某事 need to do sth. 需要做某事,主语是人。 Need doing sth. =need to be done. 需要做某事,主语是物。Stay / keep / be healthy 保持健康。A balance of …. 表示―….平衡‖。


1. He believes (she)

2. She needs a pen (write ) with.

3. You needn‘t (open) this window.

4. Need I eat this bowl of rice? Yes, You __________________.

5. We should keep a (balance) of nature.( 自然界)

6. Your hair needs ( cut).

【5】too much, too many, much too的区别:

Too much, too many修饰名词,too much 修饰不可数名词,too many 修饰可数名词。

Much too修饰形容词或副词,加强语气。


(1). We have too many homework on Saturdays. (2). She‘s too much tired , she wants to have a rest. 选择:

( ) 1. Too ( ) 2. There are flowers in the garden. A. too many B. too much C. much too D. many too

【6】Why don‘t you do…?= Why not do…? How / What about doing sth. ?做某事怎么样?

Had better (not) do sth.最好(不)做某事。

( ). Mr. White is of great help, you let him go. A. had not better B. had better don‘t C. had better not 用take , give , drink, eat 的正确形式填空:

1. The doctor told you to the medicine three times a day.

2. A doctor can you the medicine.

the medicine on time.

4. When you have a sore throat, you should lots of water.

5. It‘s important to a balanced diet.

6. fruit and vegetables is good for our health.


一. 词汇。


1. I think everyone has two_______________ (foot).

2. The old man has a serious____________________(ill).

3. Mr Chen is often__________________(stress) out.

4. It's easy to stay_______________________(health).

5. My brother's___________________(speak) Chinese is very good.

二. 选择填空。

( )1. People smell (闻)with their________.

A. noses B. ears C. hands D. mouths

( )2. If you have a toothache, you should see a________.


A. policeman B. teacher C. nurse D. dentist

( )3. We're tired because we have________ yin.

A. too many B. too much C. many too D. much too

( )4. -I am often ill. -________

A. I think so. B. That's OK. C. Really? Thank you. D. I am sorry to hear that.

( )5. -Do you often brush(刷) your________? -Yes, I do.

A. tooths B. toothes C. teeth D. teeths

三. 按要求改写下列句子,每空一词。

1. To eat a balanced diet is very important. ________very important______eat a balanced diet.

2. They are watching TV at home now. They are watching TV at home______ ______ ______.

3. What's wrong with your sister? What's________ ________with your sister?

4. She has a sore throat. There is something________ ________her throat.

5. There is a lot of milk in the bottle. There is________ ________milk in the bottle.

四. 用括号内所给动词的适当形式填空。

1. Listen!The girl_______________(sing) in the room.

2. What time______________your mother________________(go) to work every day?

3. May I_________________________(borrow) your eraser?

4. Mrs Black___________________(not work) in the factory.

5. Tom usually___________________(come) to school at seven in the morning.

6. Jack____________________________(swim) in the river now.

7. __________________(be) there any milk in the cup?

8. The students______________________(have) an English class yesterday.

9. -What are you doing? -I___________________(mend) the bike.

10. Sue________________________(clean) the windows every day.

五. 根据所给情景完成下列对话,每空一词。

A: Good afternoon, Mrs Brown!What can I do (1)_____________________________you?

B: Good afternoon, Doctor. I'm not (2)______________________________ well.

A: What's the (3)_______________________________with you? B: My head hurts.

A: Do you have a (4)_______________________________________?

B: No. My temperature seems to be (5)_____________________________(6)_______________________. A: Open your (7)________and say "Ah". B: Ah!

A: You'd better stay in (8)____________for a day (9)______________two. And take this medicine twice a day. B: (10)___________________________________.

六. 完形填空。

What should we do to keep healthy? One important rule is to exercise__1__. The Fang family try to

exercise every day. Mr Fang__2__exercise in the morning because he must get to work at exactly seven o'clock. But he runs every evening. He walks a lot, __3__. He walks to school every day, and after school

he__4__different sports with his friends. Mr Fang goes to a yoga (瑜加功) class__5__.

But it wasn't__6__this way. Last year Mr and Mrs Fang used to(过去常常)__7__everywhere in their car, even to the drugstore(药店) two blocks(街区)away. They thought they had to use the car all the time. They wouldn't walk.

The Fangs all__8__better now. They believe they shouldn't be lazy. We__9__exercise every day, but we should try our__10__to exercise as often as possible.

( )1. A. often B. sometimes C. late D. later

( )2. A. may not B. can not C. would not D. should not

( )3. A. either B. also C. too D. again

( )4. A. watches B. plays C. loves D. likes

( )5. A. in two weeks B. for two weeks C. after two weeks D. twice a week

( )6. A. always B. even C. sometimes D. no

( )7. A. riding B. drive C. fly D. walk

( )8. A. had B. make C. feel D. feel like

( )9. A. needn't B. don't C. won't have D. mustn't

( )10. A. best B. good C. well D. better

七. 阅读理解。

Mike is a factory worker. He is often very tired after a day's work. His wife, Jenny, has no job, so she stays at home to cook the meals. Every day he can have his dinner when he gets home from his factory.

One day, Mike came home very late because he was very busy in the factory. He was very hungry when 59

he got home.

He was not happy when he found his dinner was not ready. He was very angry with his wife. He shouted at her, "I'm going out to eat in a restaurant." "Wait for five minutes," said his wife. "Why? Do you think that dinner will be ready in five minutes?" asked Mike.

"Of course not," she answered. "But I can be ready to go with you in five minutes."


( )1. Mike works in________. A. a factory B. an office C. a school D. a hospital

( )2. Jenny stays at home because ________.

A. she likes cooking B. she loves her husband very much C. she doesn't have a job D. she doesn't want to work ( )3. One day, Mike came home very late because________.

A. he wanted to have dinner in a restaurant B. he had a lot of work to do

C. he was angry with his wife D. his wife didn't cook dinner

( )4. Mike was______when he found his dinner was not ready. A. happy B. glad C. hungry D. not happy ( )5. Which sentence is correct?

A. Jenny could have dinner ready in five minutes. B. Jenny wanted to go to the restaurant with her husband.

C. Jenny didn't like the dinner at home. D. Jenny didn't love her husband.

Unit 3 What are you doing for vacation?

【1】.On, in , at在时间上的用法:

On用于表示具体的某一天的上午、下午、晚上或某一天之前,也可以用于表示一般性的节日之前。如:on Friday, on a sunny morning, on September 9th. On the afternoon of January 23rd. on Children‘s Day. In用在年、月、季节、上午、下午、晚上、白天等之前。如:in May, in 2008, in Summer, in the morning, in the daytime. At用于时点、时刻。如:at 7:00, at 10:20, at noon, at night.

用in, on, at填空:

1. She usually gets up early Saturday morning.

2. I often go to bed 10:30 every night.

3. He went to Chongqing March 2011.

4. It was cloudy a rainy day.

5. We sometimes watch TV the evening Friday.

6. When is he going? He‘s going October the 12th.

7. Our school has a party

8. He got to Chengdu the afternoon of December 2011.


Show 展示,表演,给…看。Show sb. Sth.= show sth. to sb. 如: show her a photo=show a photo to her. Send 寄,送。Send sb. Sth. from + 某地= send sth. to sb. from +某地 从某地把某物寄给某人。

如:send me a pair of shoes from Chengdu= Send a pair of shoes to me from Chengdu.


1. She often sends some clothes the poor.

2. She is sending her friends them.

【3】. ―go + v-ing‖表示体育运动或娱乐消遣。如:go hiking, go bike riding, go fishing, go swimming. 用所给词恰当形式填空:

1. Let‘s go ( fish) on Monday afternoon.

2. Why not go ( dance) this evening?

3. Are they going ( swim ) next week?

4. What about going ( skate ) ?

5. Did he go ( sightsee ) yesterday ?

6. They went to Tibet 【4】、用some, any, something, anything填空:

1. Would you like to eat?

2. You shouldn‘t eat

3. Would you like 4. I‘m hungry , but there isn‘t food in the friend.

【5】、be famous for …以(因)….而闻名, 后接事迹、内容。如:She is famous for her hair.

Be famous as….以….知名, 作为…..而著名。后接表示职业的名词。如:Edison was famous as an inventor .

( )1.She is famous

her good grades.


A. about B. for C. of D. as

2.杭州以西湖而出名。Hangzhou the West Lake.

3.我的朋友因唱歌而出名。My friend his singing.

4. 刘翔因赛跑而著名。Liu Xiang a running star.

【6】、decide to do sth. 决定做某事decide on sth./ doing sth. 决定做某事。 如:I decided on France. My mother decided on buying that red coat. Leave+地点, 离开某地。Leave+ 地点 for+ 地点,离开某地去某地。 Leave for+地点, 动身去某地。

( )1. He decided on a new computer. A. in B. buy C. to buy D. buying

2.他决定去那儿。He decided there.

3.李老师上个月就离开成都去日本了。Mr. Li Chengdu Japan last month.

4.昨天下午5点她姐姐动身去了西班牙。Her sister at 5:00 yesterday afternoon.

【7】、plan to do sth. 计划做某事make a plan制订计划。

( )1. He‘s planning A. spends B. spend C. to spend D. spending

( )2. I have lots of to write.. A. to plan B. plan to C. planning D. plans

( )3. The summer holiday was A. relaxing B. relax C. relaxed D. relaxes

【8】、can‘t wait to do sth. 迫不及待做某事。 Forget to do sth. 忘记去做某事。Forget doing sth.忘记做过某事、


I can‘t you when I know your coming.

( )2. She was sorry she forget 10yuan to her friend yesterday.

A. return B. to return C. returning D. returns

( )3. Last night Tina forget the door of the classroom . When she returned to school again, she saw the door was closed.

A. closing B. to close C. close D. closes



1. There are a lot of in Hong Kong. ( beach )

2. They took a lot of last summer. ( photo )

3. I plan time with my friends. ( spend )

4. She is going with her grandfather. ( fish )

5. Don‘t forget me when you get there. ( call )

6. I want an vacation. ( excite )

7. How many does Mr. King have? ( child )

8. You shouldn‘t play computer games until you finish your composition. ( write )

9. Look! The girls in our class an English song. ( sing )

10. He sometimes TV. (watch )


( )1. My uncle to see me. He‘ll be here soon.

A. is coming B. comes C. has come D. come

( )2. –When is he going camping? –He is going camping Saturday.

A. to B. on C. in D. at

( is he staying? –He‘s staying for a week.

A. How often B. How many C. How soon D. How long

( )4. Can I ask you questions about your vacation plans?

A. some B. few C. any D. much

( )5. He wants to do .

A. different something B. something different C. anything different D. different anything

( )6. They are going to Beijing vacation. A. on B. in C. to D. for

( ) 7. My uncle is D. leaving to

( ) 8. Tomorrow Sunday. I my mother with the cooking.

A. is; help B. is; helping C. are; is helping D. is; am going to help

( ) 9. Billy videos now. A. rent B. renting C. is rent D. is renting

( ) 10. Who are you going ? A. and B. with C. for D. to


1、假期你要作什么? What you ?

2、我准备在山里徒步旅行。I‘m the .


3.、他准备在下周离开上海去北京。He is Shanghai Beijing .

4、那听起来很有趣。祝你过得愉快。 That 5、我太累了, 确实需要放松一下。I‘m . I really need .


Tony: What are you doing for vacation, Lin Hui?

Tony: That sounds interesting. Lin Hui: I‘m going hiking in the mountains. What are you doing for vacation? Tony: I‘m visiting my friend in Hong Kong.

Tony: Just for four days. I don‘t like going away for too long.

Send me a postcard from Hong Kong.

Ben Lambert, the French singer, is taking a long vacation this summer. He thought about

to Greece or Spain, but decided Canada. ― I always take vacations in Europe,‖ he said. ―This time I

want to do different. I heard that Canada is beautiful, and I know there are many people there who French.

Ben is going to Canada‘s Great Lakes. He is leaving the first week in June and staying September. He plans to a very exciting vacation. ― I‘m taking bike . I‘m planning to spend time in the beautiful countryside. I love nature. I hope I can all my problems! At night, I‘m renting videos and sleep a lot... A great vacation! I can‘t !‖

Unit 4 How do you get to school?


(1)―take+限定词语+交通工具‖,相当于―by+交通工具‖如:take a (the) bus( train, taxi, subway…)

(2)―in/ on +the+交通工具‖,一般情况下,无厢、无舱的只能用on,如:on the bike,其余用in , 如:in the car.

(3)走路:walk+ to+ 地点=go to +地点+on foot

(4)骑自行车:ride a ( the/ one‘s) bike +to+ 地点=go/ get + to+地点+by bike 或on a (the /one‘s) bike.

( )1. Yesterday I went to Jianyang ______bus . A. on B. in C. by D. with

( )2.She often _____to school every day. A. on foot B. walks C. by foot D. on the feet

( )3.—How does Li Lei get to school? A. Take a bus by bus B. By take a bus C. With a bus D. By bus

( )4.—How are you going to Jingjiang next Saturday? --

A. In B. On C. By D. With

【2】It takes sb. some time/ money to do sth.某人花费多少时间或金钱做某事。主语(人)+spend+ 钱(时间)+ on sth./ (in) doing sth. 。pay 表示―花费金钱‖,主语为人,常用pay for.。 cost花费,物作主语,某物花费某人多少金钱:sth. cost sb. some money


1. 昨天洗衣服花了她两个小时。It ______ _____ two hours _____ _____her clothes yesterday.

2.He ______ one hour in playing sports every day.

3. It _______ him ten yuan to buy this book yesterday.

【3】quick 快, 指用较短的时间或在较近的将来即可发生或完成某事,常用来形容在智力等方面反应灵敏。Fast一般指物体的运动速度快,常用来形容交通工具跑得快,人的动作快等。Soon快,不久,指现在或指定时间之后不久。

1. After a _______lunch , she went to school. 2. It will rain ________

3. She runs _________ enough to catch up with her classmates.

4. Be _________, or we‘ll be late. 5. He cleaned the classroom ________, then he went home.


(1) 地点A+is+距离数+from +地点B (2)用时间来表示:Their school is twenty minutes‘ walk from her

school. (3). It is 距离数+(away) from +地点A+to + 地点B

(4). 无具体数目, 则为A+ be + far ( away) from 某地离某地远。


It is about three _______ _______the post office _________ the park.

The post office is about three ________ ___________the park.


【5】depend on (1)视…..而定; 决定于;依赖于,依靠。(2)确定,坚信。Must be 表推测―一定‖,can‘t be表推测―一定不是‖

( )1. She has so idea, she depends _____your coming. A. on B. with C. in D. by

( )2. That book ______ hers, because her name is on it. A. mustn‘t be B. can be C. must be D. can‘t be

( )3. –Must I clean my room now? - No, you ________. A. mustn‘t B. can‘t C. needn‘t D. must

( )4. –It took me nearly 40 minutes to ride here. –Have a drink, please. You ____be thirty.

A. will B. must C. should D. can

( )5. He ______be at home now, because I saw he got out of his home just now.

A. must B. should C. mustn‘t D. can‘t

【6】―some+可数名词复数….., others….. ‖一些….其它…..如:Some women like walking, others like watching TV.。other 其他的,另外的,后而跟可数名词复数。One… the other….一个……另一个….。the others其余的或剩下的人或事物,这是表特指范围的,指剩下的全部。Else放在不定代词后面,other用在名词、代词前作定语。

1. What ________do you say? 2. She has two sons. One is Jack, the ________is Jim.

3. He is free. He wants to do something________.

【7】be different from与be the same as构成反义

A number of 许多的,相当于many, 后可接可数名词复数, the number of +可数名词复数,表示―……的数目‖

( )1. –A number of students ________in the dining hall. –Let me count. The number of the students ____about 988. A. are, is B. is, are C. are, are D. is, is

( )2. __________students like to watch TV.

A. The number of B. A number of C. Number of D. The numbers of

( )3. The number of the books in our library _________300000.

A. are B. have C. has D. is

( )4. __________your lifestyle different from his? A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does


1.Jane正在照顾她生病的母亲。 Jane is taking care of _______ ________ ________.

2.病人们需要休息。 The ________need to have a rest.

3.他昨天病了。他妈妈很担心他的病。He was _________yesterday. His mother _______ ______ ________ his ____________.



( )1. Mr Wang is leaving ________ Guangzhou next week. A. to B. with C. in D. for

( )2. -____ is it from your home to school? -Three miles. A. How far B. How much C. How soon D. How long

( )3. It will take the men half a year ________ the work. A. finish B. finishing C. to finish D. finishes

( )4. I often go to work ________. A. ride my bike B. by bike C. by a bike D. on bike

( )5. Good health depends ________ good food. A. on B. for C. at D. from

2. What about __________________________________ in the park on Sunday?

3. Miss Gao often ___________________________________________ to work.

4. The weather in China__ _______________________________that in America.

5. The twins were born in New York, but they____________________ in London.

6. He _________________________________________ school at 7:30 every day.

7. -What do you __________________the Chinese people? -They are very friendly.

8. Jim, let's ____________________________ the stone, it's dangerous on the road.

9. UN______________________________________________ the United Nations.

10. She often ____________________ me _______________________ my English.

四. 完形填空。

What do you do at weekends? Some people like to __1__ at home, but others like to go for a walk __2__ have a picnic. My friend Jack works hard in a factory during the __3__. At weekends he always __4__ the same thing. On Saturday he __5__ his car and on __6__ he takes his family to a nearby village. His uncle and aunt have a farm there. It isn't a __7__ one, but there's always __8__ to do. The children help with the animals and give them 63

their __9__, Jack and his wife help in the fields. At the end of the day, they are all __10__ and Jack's aunt gives them a big meal.

( )1. A. play B. live C. stay D. like

( )2. A. and B. or C. but D. so

( )3. A. day B. time C. autumn D. week

( )4. A. does B. makes C. borrows D. has

( )5. A. watches B. drives C. sells D. washes

( )6. A. Monday B. Sunday C. Saturday D. Wednesday

( )7. A. small B. big C. hard D. short

( )8. A. much B. little C. fast D. far

( )9. A. clothes B. places C. food D. water

( )10.A. clean B. late C. hungry D. friendly

五. 阅读理解。

People travel to work in different ways. Some people go to work on foot because they live near their work places. Some people go to work by bike because they live farther away, or they like riding bikes. They think it's good for their health. Today more people have private (私人的) cars, so they can go to work in their cars. In the south of China, many people even go to work by boat because water is around their houses. Will people go to work by plane? I think so, if necessary(如果必要的话).

根据短文内容, 判断下列句子正(T)、误(T)。

( )1. All people like to go work by bike.

( )2. Some people think it's good to go to work by bike.

( )3. Today more people drive to work.

( )4. In the north of China, many people go to work by boat.

( )5. The writer thinks some people will go to work by plane if necessary.

Unit 5 Can you come to my party?

【1】have(has) to表示客观存在的必须,而must是主观存在的必须。

( ) 1. Anna‘s parents are too busy, she ____ help them. A. must B. has to C. need D. have to

( )2. You _____finish your homework after school first.. A.. must B. need C. had to D. have to

( )3. -Can you come to the party this weekend? –I‘m afraid I can‘t. I ____ wash my clothes.

A. can B. may C. have to D. would

【2】another常用于三个或三个以上的不确定数目中的任何一个。The other 指两个中的另一个。 Another+大于1的数词+复数名词,意为―又几个…..‖如:another two eggs又两个鸡蛋。

Some, any, no, many, a few, a little等词+more +可数名词或不可数名词。如:They need a little more water.他们还需要一些水。

用another, the other, more 填空:

1.This pair of shoes is too small. Could you please show me___________ pair.

2. I ate two apples , but I want two _______apples.

3.She has two daughters, one is a farmer, ______________is a teacher.


1. I have a ticket, but I want more ticket.

2. There are two books in my hand . One is on math, another is on English.

【3】Thanks for 为….而感谢,Thanks for doing sth. give a concert举行音乐会

Have fun=have a good time= enjoy oneself.

【4】What‘ s today?= What‘s the date today? 今天几号?What day is it today? 今天星期几?

【5】have +球类+ training 进行…..训练 do sth. with sb. 和某人一起做某事

【6】the invitation to….意为―…….的请柬‖invite sb. to do sth.邀请某人做某事

Why don‘t you do sth?= Why not do sth.?



( )1.She can‘t help her mother. She is _________.

A. practice piano B. practicing the piano C. practices the piano D. practicing piano

( )2. ─Can you come over to my house to watch the video? ─_____________.


A. I would like B. I had love to C. I had like to D. I would love to

( )3. Sam has a cold today, so he _________ stay at home. A. have to B. has C. has to D. have ( )4. Thank you for your _________. I‘ll go to your house next weekend.

A. invite B. inviting C. invitation D. ask

( )5. My mother is busy ____ the room. A. clean B. to clean C. cleaning D. cleans

( )6. Please practice ________ English. A. speak B. speaking C. to speak D. to speaking

( )7. He is a foreigner. He ___________ speak English. A. maybe B. may be C. can be D. is ( )8. I can‘t go out and play soccer. I have ________ housework today.

A. too much B. many too C. much too D. too many

( )9. Do you go to school _________ Saturday afternoon? A. in B. at C. on D. for ( )10. They arrived there ________ cold Sunday morning. A. in the B. on the C. in a D. on a ( )11. ---Mom, I have a lot of homework, must I clean the room now?

---Ok, you ___. But you must do it when you finish your homework. A. must B. canC. mustn‘t D. needn‘t ( )12. Thank you _______ me about this. It‘s very kind _____ you.

A. to telling, for B. for tell, of C. for telling, for D. for telling, of

( )13. ---Susan, are you free tonight? Do you want to go to the cinema with me ? --- Sorry, Peter. I am

busy ______ midnight. Maybe next time. A. to B. till C. from D. /

( )14. ─ What‘s the date today? ─ ____________

A. It‘s Monday. B. It‘s cloudy. C. It‘s October 21 st. D. It‘s Monday the 21 st.

( )15. I want to _______ the mall?

A. invite he go to B. invite him go to C. invite he to go to D. invite him to go to

2. The ___________________ Sunday in May is Mother‘s Day.

3. Please be quiet! I‘m trying _______________. I‘m very tired.

4. Don‘t make any noise in the ______________________ room.

5. My American friend is going to ___________________ me next vacation.

6. Do you want _______________________ to my birthday party?

7. She can‘t join us because she _______________________ help her mom.

8. Did Tom _______________________ football last weekend?

9. Why __________________________ to Linda‘s party?

10. What about __________________________ to the concert.



Have you ever seen a horse with toes? Millions of years ago, horses had many toes(趾). They had four toes on each foot. They had three toes on each back foot. The horses were smaller than cats.

These small horses lived in the forest. Their many toes helped the horses run over the soft wet ground. It was very hot in the forest. But the weather changed. It became cold. Many trees couldn‘t live in cold weather. The trees died and fell. Open field took the place of forests. The sun made the ground dry and hard.

Horses began to change, too. They began to get bigger. This took a long time. On the dry land, horses needed their middle toes for running. Their middle toes became hard. After a long time, horses had only one hard toe on each foot. We call this hard toe a hoof.

( ) 1. Long time ago, the horse had four toes on each of its _______

A. back feet B front feet C. right feet D. left feet

( ) 2. The cats were _______ the horses at that time.

A. much bigger B. smaller than C. bigger than D. much smaller

( ) 3. Which of the three sentences is true?

A. The weather stays the same the whole year all over the world.

B. When the weather changed, animals began to change, too.

C. Cats were bigger in the past than they are today.

D. Horses have three toes on each back foot today.

( ) 4. On the dry hard land __________.

A.horses needed a lot of room for running. B. a horse needed more than four toes for running

C. horses needed only their middle toes for running D.horses hated running

( ) 5. Now each horse has ________ on its feet. A. one toe B. two toes C. three toes D. four toes




Bill and Fred were students and they were friends. They didn‘t have much money, so when it was time for their summer holidays, Bill said,‖ Let‘s take out holidays on a trailer(三轮车、拖车). It‘s cheaper than a hotel. I can borrow my father‘s trailer.‖ Fred was very happy, so they got into the trailer and began their holidays. They wanted to get up early the next day to go fishing, but they didn‘t have an alarm clock.

―That‘ all right, Bill,‖ said Fred. ―I‘ll put these small pieces of bread on the roof of the trailer tonight and they‘ll wake us up in the morning.‖ Bill was very surprised, but he didn‘t say anything.

Fred was right. As soon as it began to get light, small birds came down to eat the bread and their noise on the roof of the trailer woke Bill and Fred up quickly.

( ) 1. Bill and Fred wanted to stay together during their holidays.

( ) 2. They had no room, so Bill‘s father lent his to them.

( ) 3. They didn‘t get up early the next morning because they didn‘t have an alarm clock.

( ) 4. Fred found a way to wake them up in the morning.

( ) 5. Fred bought some small birds to wake them up.


Jimmy started painting when he was three years old, and when he was five he was already very__1___ at it. He painted many beautiful and interesting pictures, and a lot of people bought his pictures. They said, ―this boy is going to be ___2___ when he‘s a little order, and then we‘re going to ___3___ these pictures for a lot more money.‖

Jimmy‘s pictures were different___4____ other people‘s because he ___5___ painted on all of the paper. He painted on ___6___ of it, and other half was always ___7___.

―That‘s very clever,‖ everyone said. ―___8___ painters have ever done that.‖

One day someone bought one of Jimmy‘s pictures and then said to him, ―please tell me this, Jimmy. Why do you paint on the bottom half of the pictures, but not the ___9___ half?‖

―Because I‘m ___10___,‖ Jimmy said, ―and my brushes don‘t reach very high.‖

( ) 1. A. good B. bad C. poor D. rich

( ) 2. A. ill B. nothing C. unknown D. famous

( ) 3. A. buy B. sell C. get D. have

( ) 4. A. to B, in C. from D. at

( ) 5. A. always B. never C. often D. usually

( ) 6. A. whole B. half C. quarter D. back

( ) 7. A. beautiful B. dirty C. empty D. full

( ) 8. A. No B. Other C. Some D. No one

( ) 9. A. top B. middle C. left D. right

( ) 10. A. tall B. big C. young D. small

unit 6 I’m more outgoing than my sister.


比较级形容词或副词 + than

You are taller than I. They lights in your room are as bright as those in mine.

注意:1)要避免重复使用比较级。(错)He is more cleverer than his brother. (对)He is more clever than his brother. (对)He is clever than his brother.


(错)China is larger that any country in Asia. (对)China is larger than any other countries in Asia.


The population of Shanghai is larger than that of Beijing.

It is easier to make a plan than to carry it out.


比较:Which is large,Canada or Australia? Which is the larger country,Canada or Australia? She is taller than her two sisters. She is the taller of the two sisters.

the + 最高级 + 比较范围

1)The Sahara is the biggest desert in the world.

形容词最高级前通常必须用定冠词 the,副词最高级前可不用。



It is a most important problem. =It is a very important problem.


(错)Tom is the tallest of his three brothers. (对)Tom is the tallest of the three brothers.

2)下列词可修饰最高级,by far,far,much,mostly,almost

This hat is nearly / almost the biggest.


a. very可修饰最高级,但位置与much不同。This is the very best. This is much the best.

b. 序数词通常只修饰最高级。Africa is the second largest continent.


Mike is the most intelligent in his class. Mike is more intelligent than any other students in his class.

4)―否定词语+比较级‖,―否定词语+ so… as‖结构表示最高级含义。

Nothing is so easy as this.=Nothing is easier than this.=This is the easiest thing.

as + 形容词或副词原级 + as

1)在否定句或疑问句中可用so… as. He cannot run so/as fast as you.

2)当as… as 中间有名词时采用以下格式。

as +形容词+ a +单数名词 as + many/much +名词

This is as good an example as the other is. I can carry as much paper as you can……


This room is twice as big as that one. Your room is the same size as mine.

4)倍数+ as + adj. + as <=> 倍数+ then + of

This bridge is three times as long as that one. This bridge is three times the length of that one.

Your room is twice as large as mine. Your room is twice the size of mine.


1)a bit,a little,rather,much,far,by far,many,a lot,lots,a great deal,any,still,even等


3)以上词(除by far)外,必须置于比较级形容词或副词的前面。

many,old 和far

1)如果后接名词时,much more +不可数名词 many more +可数名词复数

2)old 有两种比较级和最高级形式:older/oldest 和elder/eldest. elder,eldest 只用于兄弟姐妹的长幼关系。 My elder brother is an engineer. Mary is the eldest of the three sisters.

3)far 有两种比较级,farther,further. 在英语中两者都可指距离。

在美语中,father 表示距离,further表示进一步。I have nothing further to say.


1)— Are you feeling ____?— Yes,I‘m fine now. A. any well B. any better C. quite good D. quite better 答案:B。any 可修饰比较级,quite修饰原级,well的比较级为better.

2)The experiment was____ easier than we had expected. A. more B much more C. much D. more much


3)If there were no examinations,we should have ___ at school.

A. the happiest timeB. a more happier time C. much happiest time D.a much happier time




1>当比较的对象A与 B情况对比相同时,要使用以下结构:

主语+谓语(系动词)+as+形容词/ 副词原形+as+从句。

I study English as hard as my brother. 我同我兄弟一样学习努力。


数比较的词在一起时候等,他们的位置是,倍数词+as…as…,或倍数词+more… than…即:

This river is twice as long as that one. 这条河的长度是那条河的两倍。

Smoking is so harmful to personal health that it kills people each year seven times more than automobile accidents. 吸烟对人体健康危害如此之大以致于由它所导致的人口死亡是其他事故的7倍之多。

2) 常见比较级五句型

1> Who / Which + be +比较级 , A or B ?

Who is taller, Tom or John? Which is more expensive, a bicycle or a computer?


2> ~ + be + the 比较级 + of the two. (两个之中比较…的那一个,~包含在两个之中)

Tom is the taller of the two. = Tom is taller than the other boy.

3> much / a lot / even / far + 比较级

A compute is much more expensive than a bicycle. 计算机比自行车贵多了。

4> "The+形容词比较级..., the+形容词比较级...", 表示 " 越... 就越..."。

The more you study, the more you know. 你学的越多, 就知道的越多。

5> " 形容词比较级 + and + 形容词比较级 ", 表示 " 越来越... "。

The computer is cheaper and cheaper. 计算机越来越便宜。

3) 最高级不一定就是第一

1> Who / Which + be +最高级, A, B, or C ?

Who is the tallest, Tom, Jack, or David? Tom, Jack与David三个人中谁最高?

Which is the most expensive, a bicycle, a motorcycle, or a car? 自行车,摩托车和汽车,哪一个最贵? 2> ~ + be + one of the +最高级 +复数名词, 表示"最……的……之一"。

The Yellow River is one of the longest rivers in China. 黄河是中国最长的河流之一。

3> "…+ be +the + 序数词 +最高级 +单数名词 + 范围", 表示"……是…….的第几……"。

She is the second tallest student in our class. 她是我们班第二高的学生。

4> ~ + be + the 最高级 ~ that 某人 have/ has ever + 过去分词.

This is the most interesting book that I have ever read.这是我看过的最有趣的书。



1. Bob is _________ ( young ) than Fred but ___________ (tall) than Fred.

2. Yingtian is not as ___________ (tall) as Yongxian.

3. Almost all.the students' faces are the same but Li Deming looks _______ (fat) than

before the holidays,

4.Which is _________ (heavy),a hen or a chicken?

5.-- How _________ (tall) is Sally? -- She' s 1.55 metres ________ (tall). What abodt Xiaoling?

-- She' s only 1.40 metres ________ (tall). She is much _______ (short) than Sally.

She is also the _______ (short) girl in the class.

6. He is ______ (bad) at learning maths. He is much _______ (bad) at Chinese and he is the _________

(bad) at English.

7. Annie says Sally is the ________ (kind) person in the world.

8.He is one of the_________(friendly) people in the class, I think.

9. A dictionary is much _________ (expensive) than a story-book.

10. An orange ia a little ______ (big) than an apple, but much ________ (small) than a watermelon.

11. The Changjiang River is the _______ (long) river in China.

12. Sue is a little ________ (beautiful) than her sister.

13.My room is not as _________ (big) as my brother' s.

14.--How difficult is physics? --I' m not sure.

-- Is it ________ (difficult) than maths? -- I don' t think so.

15.-- Annie plays the piano very ___________ (well).

-- Sue plays it _____ (well) than Annie. And Sally plays it the __________ (well).

16. Saturday is my _________ (busy) day in a week.

17. Her mother is getting ____________(fat) and ________ (fat).

18. I think it' s too expensive. I' d like a _____________ (cheap) one.

19. He comes to school much ____________ (early) than I.

20.This book is not as _____________ (interesting) as that one.

21. Your classroom is __________(wide) and ___________(bright) than ours.

22. Practise as __________ (much) as you can.

23. The ________ (much), the ____________ (good).

24. Nowadays English is __________( important ) than any other subject, 1 think.

25. Most of the students think a lion is much ________(dangerous) than a bear and

it is the __________ (dangerous) animal in the world.


1 她看起来不如玛丽年轻。

She doesn't look __________ _________ __________ Mary.



Jack's father is __________ _________ _________ than her mother.


Our classroom is ___________ ___________ than theirs.


Look out! The mad is becoming ________ and _________ ________.


Which animal do you like __________ , a cat or a dog?

【2】stop doing sth.停止做某事,指停止做正在做的某件事。Stop to do sth.停下来做另一件事。

( )1. She should stop ______, she has a headache because she has read too long.

A. to work B. work C. working D. worked

( )2. They too tired , so they stop ______and have a rest.

A. working B. to work C. work D. to working

( )3. Please stop_______ . It‘s time for class. A. to talk B. talking C. talk D. to speak


一、how long / how far

how long多长,用来询问时间, 指时间上的长短。How far多远,用来询问距离,指路上的远近。

1、 is it from your home to school?

2、 does it take them to clean the classroom?

二、get / arrive / reach

1、I often to school by bike. 2、She will in Beijing in a week.

3、They Shanghai the day before yesterday.

三、have to / must

两者都有―必须‖的意思, 它们的基本区别是:have to 表示客观上的义务;而must则表示主观上的意愿或需要。

1、We eat more vegetables.

2、look after my sister.

四、too much / much too

too much 是用too来修饰much,加深much的程度,意思是―太多‖,作定语时,后接不可数名词。

much too是用much来增强too的语气,意思是―太...‖,后面常接形容词。

1、The boy is food.

2、 busy every day.



( )1.Tom did not do______English as her sister.

A.as good at B. as well in C. as better than D. as best as

( )2.I have a friend who talks _____and do _______than me .

A.less ,more B. little ,more C. little ,more D. much ,less

( )3.She is ________more athletic than me. A. little B. a little C. more D. very

( )4.David is the same _________me. A.with B. as C. to D. from

( )5.The twins _______quiet. A.are both B. both are C. both of D. are all

( )6.Thank you _______your present. A. at B. for C. in D. but

( )7.My friend David and I have some things________common. A. from B. in C. at D. for ( )8.I‘m _____tennis than my father. A.best at B. better in C. good at D. better at

( )9.I have a twin sister,she is ______than me. A. athletic B. fat C. biger D. more athletic

2.Louis is ________than Jerry.

3.The twins are _______quiet at home ,they don‘t like to go out.

4.I have _______milk.I have to buy some.

5.The students like__________music all the time.


1.Thank you _________________your last letter.


2.My parents are __________________teachers.

3.My sister is _________________outgoing than me.

4.Liu Li has more _________________________one sister.

5.Liu Ying and Liu Li are the same____________________some ways.

Unit 7 How do you make a banana milk smoothie?


打开 turn off把…关掉 turn down把…音量调小 turn up把…音量调大

【2】peel sb. sth.=peel sth. for sb.为某人剥皮 pour… into… 把….往….倒 pour sb. sth.=pour sth. for sb.为某人倒某物。

1.请先把香蕉剥了皮,再把它们切碎了。Please _____the bananas first, then _____ _____ ____

2.我想睡了,请把电视关了。I _____ _____ sleep, _____ _____ the TV, please.


________the milk and the bananas ______ the blender, then ______ _______ ______.


1.当名词作定语时,做定语的名词要用单数形式。如: two shoe shops两家鞋店

2.man, woman 作定语时,单复数形式与所修饰的名词要一致。如:a woman worker, 一个女工 three women teachers.三位女教师。


Get up 起床stay up熬夜 drive up向上开 look up仰视 jump up跳起来 stand up站起来call up给某人打电话 mix up混合 cut up切碎 ring up 给某要打电话

( )1. I will_____ when I get to Chengdu. A. call you up B. call up you C. look at D. look up

( )2. Please cut ______ the bananas. A. on B. up C. at D. with

( )3. _______ too tired. Have a rest. A. Not B. Don‘t is C. Not be D. Don‘t be

( )4. She ____when she heard the good news. A. got up B. jump up C. jumped up D. jumps up

( )5. ____get stressed out! Relax! A. Don‘t B. Don‘t be C. Not D. No



( )31.Please cut ________ the banana ________ small pieces.

A.up, to B.up, into C.off, to C.off, into

( )2.Please ________ the light when you leave the room.

A.turn off B.turn on C.turn up D.turn down

( )3.________ cups of yogurt do we need?

A.How B.How much C.How many D.How many of

( )4.—________ bread would you like?

—Three pieces of ________.

A.How many, breads B.How many, bread C.How much, breads D.How much, bread

( )5.Will you add ________ to the salad?

A.many honeys B.much honeys C.more honey D.many more honey

( )6.Put some ________ and chicken ________ on the sandwich.

A.lettuce, slice B.lettuces, slices C.lettuce, slices D.lettuces, slice

( )7.________ mix these things together.

A.Not B.No C.Don‘t D.You aren‘t

( )8.There ________ two slices of turkey on the table and there ________ some relish on the slices.

A.are, are B.are, is C.is, is D.is, are

1.2.I can‘t come. I ________ a really busy day .

3.Mr Green likes to ________ sandwiches with lettuce.

4.Let‘s ________ some banana smoothie .

5.________ some more salt to the popcorn, please.

6.You have to ________ the banana before eating it.

7.Can you help me ________ these tomatoes?


8.Don‘t ________ waste water into the river.

9.Next you need to ________ all these things into the blender.

10.Finally, ________ on the blender and you‘ll get some fruit salad.


My brother, Tom, 1 in a butcher‘s shop(肉店). He helps the butcher to do some 2 He puts Tom runs to get some 5 . They are in 6 room and they are on the highest shelf. Tom is tall, but he still can‘t reach the meat. Tom thinksand puts the one ( )1. A.lives B.studies C.works D.stays

( )2. A.housework B.homework C.dirty work D.hard work ( )3. A.are B.aren‘t C.is D.isn‘t ( )4. A.meats B.some meats C.some meat D.some piece of meat

( )5. A.piece of meat B.pieces of meat C.piece of meats D.pieces of meats ( )6. A.another B.other C.the other D.others ( )7. A.of B.for C.over D.about ( )8. A.a box B.two box C.two boxes D.two boxs ( )9. A.it B.they C.them D.their ( )10. A.the meats B.the pieces of meat C.the piece D.the piece of meat



Many places in the world need more fresh(淡的)water. Every country is trying to find ways to turn salt water into fresh.

Why aren‘t there many factories like the Symi factory?

In some places,the sun isn‘t hot enough,or it doesn‘t shine every day. In these places,other ways of heating(加热)sea water can be used. These ways cost more money,but they work faster than the sun. By boiling(煮沸)sea water with high heat,a lot of fresh water can be made quickly.

But heating is not the only way to get fresh water from salt water. Other ways are tried. One way is freezing(冷冻). The fresh part of salt water freezes first. To get fresh water, the pieces of ice are taken out. Which way is best? The one that gives the most water for the least money. It may be a different way for each place. Symi‘s way seems very good for small, hot places. It doesn‘t make very much water at a time. But the factory is easy to build and cost little.

That‘s why people in many dry places talk about Symi!

( )1.From the passage we know that fresh water ________.

A.is needed in many countries B.is needed in every country

C.is very important for factories D.is very important for factories

( )2.The Symi factory ________.

A.is a fresh-water factory B.can be built everywhere

C.can make much fresh water at a time D.doesn‘t need sunshine every day

( )3.Which is the best way for small and hot places to get fresh water?

A.Boiling or heating the sea water. B.The way in sunny places.

C.The Symi‘s way. D.Freezing the sea water in cold places.

( )4.The writer is mainly talking about ________.

A.water-making factories in different countries B.the ways of making fresh water from sea water

C.hot places and dry places D.how to make good use of the sunlight

( )5.Which is wrong?

A.New ways are tried to get fresh water. B.Heating can make a lot of fresh water quickly.

C.The best way is to get the most fresh water with the least(最少)money

D.The Symi‘s way doesn‘t work in dry places .


Sandwich is an Englishman. He lives in the 18th century. Sandwich is rich, but he likes to played cards for money. He often play for 24 hours, and doesn‘t even stop to have his meals. He orders his servants to bring him some meat and bread. He puts the meat between the two pieces of bread and holds the food in his left hand while 71

he play cards with his right hand. People like Sandwich‘d idea, and from then on they eat bread and meat as Sandwich does.

From the name of the man, Sandwich, we have the word of the food―sandwich‖today.

66.Which country does Sandwich live in? ______________________________

67.What does Sandwich like to do?____________________________________

68.Why does Sandwich let others bring him something to eat?____________________

69.How does Sandwich eat bread and meat when he plays cards?_____________________

70.Can you say something about the food ―sandwich‖?___________________

Unit 8 How was your school trip?

【1】buy sb. sth.=buy sth. for sb. 给某人买某物 buy sth. from someplace从某地买某物

Sell sb. sth.=sell sth. to sb. 卖某物给某人

( )1. Yesterday my mother bought a pen_____ me. A. at B. to C. for D. in

( )2. Last Saturday , I sold the old TV____ him. A. on B. to C. in D. for

( )3. They took two photos____ this young boy. He smiled sweetly. A. for B. to C. of

( )4. Most students bought pencils ____the school shop. A. from B. for C. to D. on

【2】have a day off休息一天 have three days off= have three-day holiday休息三天(三天的假) On one‘s …. day off 在某人休息日里。

【3】go for a drive开车去兜风 go for + 名词 如:go for a walk go for a swim

( )1. _____ her last day off, she slept late. A. In B. On C. At D. For

( )2. She is ill, she wants to have three days____. A. off B. in C. on D. for

【4】have +食物+ for +餐名 表示一日三餐的某一餐吃什么



( ) 1.He looks sad. Let‘s cheer him ____ . A. up B. in C. out D. at

( ) 2.Tony could help ______ the city parks. A. clean B. clean up C. clean out D. cleans up.

( ) 3. I _____like to help kids with their schoolwork. A. could B. would C. should D. will

( ) 4. Not only the students ____ also their teacher likes football. A. too B. except C. however D. but

( ) 5. we need to ____ up with a plan on Clean-up Day. A. come B. go C. work D. study

( ) 6. I _______ some clothes to charity because they are too small for me.

A. take after B. hang out C. give away D. put off

( ) 7. Now I spend time _____ what I love to do. A. to do B. doing C. do D. did

( ) 8. After my teacher gave me a lesson, I didn‘t do that ___. A. any B. more C. any more D. no more

( ) 9. ____ of them like to play basketball. A. Each B. Everyone C. Every D. Both

( ) 10. It often snows in ____ winter. A. a B. an C. the D. /

( )11. I first met Joe three years ago. He ____ at a CD shop at the time.

A. will work B. is working C. has worked D. was working

( )12. Amy ____the windows already, so the room looks much bright.

A. cleans B. has cleaned C. is cleaning D. will clean

( )13. The zoo was far away from my hotel. It ____ me at least two hours to get there.

A. took B. has take C. takes D. will take

( )14. –I‘m sorry to keep you waiting. --Oh, not at all. I ____here for only a few minutes.

A.was B. is C. have been D. had been

( )15. My mother _____dinner when I got home. A. was cooking B. cooked C. has cooked D. cooks

二 完型填空


Monday he told a radio interviewer that he had run out of 4. to buy old bikes. He also put up some 5. asking for old bikes and called up all his friends and told them about the problem. He even handed 6. _____advertisements at a local

supermarket. Then he told the teachers at 7._______ about his problem and they set up a call-in center for parents. The strategies 8.______ he came up with worked out fine. He now 9.____ sixteen bikes to fix up and give away to 10.______ who don‘t have bikes.

( ) 1. A. everyone B. every C. all D. both

( ) 2. A. that B. these C. this D. those

( ) 3. A. In B. On C. At D. With

( ) 4. A. money B. time C. food

D. water


( ) 5. A. pencils B. books C. pictures D. signs

( ) 6. A. out B. in C. with D. at

( ) 7. A. shop B. hospital C. school D. bank

( ) 8. A. this B. who C. that D. where

( ) 9. A. have B. has C. had D. have been

( )10.A. child B. a child C. children D. Jimmy


. He can‘t his feet. His friend, Dick, says to him, ― don‘t you go to a shoemaker? A you the right shoes.‖ Paul goes to the shoemaker near Dick‘s home. Very the shoes

the shoemaker, ―You aren‘t good shoemaker! I want you to make me one you make me one shoe smaller than the other.‖

( ) 1.A. other B. the other C. another D. that one

( ) 2.A. see B. look for C. find D. search

( ) 3.A. for B. on C. with D. about

( ) 4.A. How B. What C. Where D. Why

( ) 5.A. take B. give C. make D. mend

( ) 6.A. So B. Then C. But D. Or

( ) 7.A. looks B. looks at C. see D. see at

( ) 8.A. say B. says C. saying D. says to

( ) 9.A. the B. that C. one D. a

( ) 10.A. then B. or C. and D. but

三 阅读理解

When do you think of a forest, what do you see? Just trees? Or do you see many other things, such as singing birds, colorful plants and wild flowers? The forest is a whole world of its own. It is full of many different living things(生物). But even though they are all different, they have one thing in common: they all need each other in order to live on The trees feed the forest ―people‖ by making food in their leaves; by using sunlight to join water and minerals(矿物) from the soil and air. Their deep network of roots joins the soil together and stops it from dying out, making it possible for living things to live in it.Human beings(人类) are like the living things in the forest. We need one another in order to live. We need the farmers to grow our food, railroad and truck drivers to bring it to our shops and clerks(售货员) to sell it to us. We need people to prepare our food and cook it and others to take our waste things away. Then, of course, we need doctors, nurses, government leaders, mailmen, telephone operators, and many others. We also need other human beings in another way. We need people for friendship, to talk over our problems, exchange ideas. Think how lonely and unhappy you would be if you lived all alone. Life is a matter of giving and taking. We need to help other people as much as we need other people to help us. Think what a good feeling you have when you have done something for someone else. You know, being a volunteer is so great!

( )1. According to the text, colorful plants and flowers live on _____.

A. the leaves of the trees B. water and minerals C. the soil and air D. all of the above

( )2. It is the ____ that make it possible for living things to live in the forest.

A. trees B. birds C. plants D. farmers

( ) 3.According to the writer, human beings are ______ the forest ―people‖.

A. different from B. like C. dislike D. unhappy with

( ) 4.The writer mainly wants to tell us_______.

A. we need people for friendship B. we need one another in order to live

C. the forest is a whole world of its own D. the forest is full of different living things

( )5. Which one is the relationship(关系) between a forest and your life.

A. We can see trees in the forests. B. We like the living things in the forest.

C. We need farmers to grow our food in the forest.

D. We are the same as the forest; We need each other to live on.

Unit 9 When was he born?



1).带"to" 的有


1..can‘t wait to do sth. 迫不及待要做某事

2.can't help laughing 情不自禁

3.agree to do Sth/with Sb/Sth 同意干 /某人/某事

4.Ask (tell sb. (not ) to do sth. 要求/告诉某人(不)做某事

5.Allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事

6.Would like /want (sb.) to do sth. 想要做某事

7.Have sth/nothing to do 有…时要做/与…无关

8.Find it +adj. to do sth. 发觉做某事…

9.Prefer to do sth. rather than do sth.=prefer+V-ing ..to + V -ing 宁愿做某事,而不愿做某事

10.It‘s time to do sth.\ It‘s time for sth 该做某事的时候了

11.It‘s +adj. for sb. to do sth. 对某人来说做某事是怎么样的

12.It‘s +adj. of sb. to do sth.做某事对某人来说是…(假如Sb be adj 通顺就用of )

13.It‘s better /best to do sth. 最好做某事

14.It takes sb. st. to do sth. 某人花时间做某事

15.used do sth. 过去常常干….

16.do /try one 's best to do Sth 尽力干某事

17.change one 's mind to do S th 改变某人的主意干...

18.be afraid /terrfied to + V 害怕...干...

19.be proud/ the pride to +v=take pride in +V -ing 以...而骄傲/自豪

20.be excited to + V /for + n /Pron 对干.、、、感到兴奋

21.be surprised to +V /with +n /pron 对干...感到惊奇


1. too…to do sth. 太…而不能… 2. so +adj. /adv + that(从句) 如此…以致…

3.such +(a/an +adj.)+n.+ that(从句) 如此…以致…4.(not) enough (for sb.) to do sth. (对某人来说)做某事(不)够Eg A.The boy is too young to go to school.B.The boy is so young that he can‘t go to school. C.He is such a young boy that he can‘t go to school.

D.The boy is not old to go to school. 他太年轻而不能去上学.

3) 另外对比介词一起记忆,以下不同的是+名词/代词.

1.say "hello to Sb "/"Goodbye " to Sb 向...问好/说再见 2.take ... to .... 把..拿...地方去

3.bring .... to 把..从..地方带来 4.show ..Sth to S b 把...给..看

5.send ..Sth to Sw .发射...到/派遣... 去.... 6.get/be married to+ Sb 与 结婚

7.lend Sth to Sb 把....借给.... (borrow ..S th .. from Sb从....借进.... )

假如把两个宾语位置对调,则上省略"to " 。lend Sb.+Sth buy /cook /read .Sth for Sb 为....买/煮/读 注意:Sth /Sb全部用 代词的 宾格.Sth =somthing S b =somebody sw =somewhere


1....'d (had ) better do Sth /not do Sth ...最好干/别干.......

2.feel /see /hear /watch Sb do/not do Sth 感觉/看到/听到/观看/注意...干...(感官动词)

3.let /make Sb do /not do Sth 让/使得.....干... (使役动词)

注意:make + n. 使某人成为 make + sb. + adj. 使某人…(是连系动词)

Eg.A.We made Peter our monitor. B.The music makes us amazing . C.He often makes me laugh. E.G It made me _____ A .happy .B happily C .danger D .pleasure ( 答案:A,形容词 )

4.Help sb. (to) do sth/ with sth. 帮助某人作某事

5.Why don‘t you/ not do sth. 为什么不做某事

6.Would /Will / Could you please (not) do sth. 请你(不)作某事好吗?

注意:do 即+ 动词原形,假如是否定形式,就直接+not

三、常用动名词的短语(V-ing )

1.Enjoy /like /love /be fond of doing sth. 喜欢做某事 2.Keep /keep on /carry on / go on dong sth.继续做某事 注意:keep +adj. 保持…状态 (是连系动词)

3.Feel like doing sth. =wand to do = ..would like to do Sth 想要做某事

4.Practice doing sth.练习做某事

5.Give up doing sth. 放弃作某事

6.Be good at/ do well in doing sth. 擅长作某事

7.What about/ how about doing sth. ..怎么样(好吗)?


8.Thank you for doing sth. 为…感谢某人

9.Mind doing sth. 介意作某事

10.Be used for doing sth./ be used to do sth被用来作某事

11.Sb +Spend …(in) doing S th. 谁花时间作某时

12.Be/get busy doing/ with sth. 忙于作某事

13.Finish doing sth. 作完某时

14.Prefer doing sth. to doing sth. 喜欢…而不…

15.Be/get used doing sth. 习惯作某事

16.Keep / stop/ prevent sb. from doing sth. 阻止某人作某事

17.countine /till/finish/consider+V-ing,继续/一直/完成/认为干..

18. be afraid /terrfied of +V ing 害怕...干...


四、 同义词比较1、 Stop to do sth. 停下来正在做的事去作另一件事 Stop doing sth. 停止正在作的事 Eg. When the teacher came into the classroom, the students stopped talking. After he worked for an hour, he stopped to have a rest.

2、 Forget / remember to do sth. 忘记/记得要去作某事Forget / remember doing sth. 忘记记得曾经做过某事。Eg. A.Please remember to bring my book to school. B. I remember doing my homework

3、 used to do sth. 过去常常作某事 be used to do sth. 被用来作某事 be/get used to doing sth. 习惯于作某事eg. A .My father used to smoking,did n' t he? . 你的父亲过去常常吸烟,对吗?B .Wood is used to make paper.木是用来造纸的 C. I am used to getting up early.我习惯于早起。


1. He ___________(swim)in the river when it began to rain.

2. While she was shopping someone ______________(come)to the house.

3. Give me some water ______________(drink) 4. Endangered has no place ______________(live )in .

5. I went there ______________ (see)him. 6. He was kind enough ________________(excuse)me. 7 He works hard _________(pass)the exam.

8. I‘m sorry __________(have)kept you waiting.

9. He lived _____(see)his son a great man. 9. He must be very rich _______________(buy)that big house.

10. This is too difficult ______________(understand).11. English is not easy __________________(learn). 12 You had better ___________(not put )the picture up on the wall.

13. Would you like _____________(research )into the room or would you rather stay here?

14. The room is large enough for 100 people __________(sit )a meeting in

15.You‘d better have someone ______________________________(protect 保护)it for you.

16. I‘m going to listen to the radio. Please ____________________(not talk)any more.

17.Look,there is a purse _______________ ( lie ) on the ground .

18.He often saw her ___________________________( go ) upstairs alone .

【2】play for… 为…效力play… with…与某人一起玩 Play with sth.玩某物

( )1. Tom played ______ the school basketball team when he was ten. A. with B. for C. and

( )2. He often plays football _____ his friends A. with B. for C. and

【3】用take, spend, pay, cost填空:

1. She ____ two dollars for the book just now.

2. It _____ him half an hour to do his homework last night.

3.This coat_____ me thirty dollars yesterday.

4. His sister ____ her weekend with her sometimes.

5. The day before yesterday she _____ 3000 yuan on the computer.

【4】alive 活着的,在世的living现行的,健在的,当代的,现代的 live居住,活的,有生命

1.Mr. Li is the only person ____________in the car accident. 2.Is the bear ______________ or dead?

3.Where does she _________________? 4. They caught the duck_________________.

5.He put the ________________loin into a yard. 6. The ____________always think of the old.

【5】be the first person to do sth.是第一做…..的人



(1)表示时间的状语从句可以由when,whenever,as,while,before,until,ever since,as soon as等词引导。


As a young man (=When he was a young man),he was fond of hunting.他年轻时,喜欢打猎。

When the rain stopped,students rushed out of the classroom.雨停了,学生们冲出教室。

My mother was cooking while I was doing my homework.我做作业时母亲在做饭。

We were about to set off when it suddenly began to rain.我们刚要出发,突然下起雨来。

It will be half a year before I come back.我半年之后才回来。

(2)名词词组引导时间状语从句:every/each time每一次;the moment/minute那时(一……就……);the first/second time 第一/二次;the last time最后一次;the day那一天;the week那一周等。

Every time I see him,he looks miserable.每次我看见他,他都是一副愁眉苦脸的样子。

He said he‘d phone you the moment he got home.他说他一到家就给你打电话。

(3)as soon as,instantly,directly,immediately等表示从句动作一发生,主句动作随即发生,通常意为―一……就……‖,也可引起表示时间的状语从句。

The moment I saw it,I fell in love with it.我一看见它就爱上了它。

Directly I had done it,I knew I had made a mistake.我一做完,就知道犯了个错误。

He rushed upstairs immediately he heard a loud noise.他一听到大的响动就冲上了楼梯。

(4)no sooner...than 和hardly...when引导的从句表示―刚……就……‖。主句中的动词一般用过去完成时,从句用过去时。若把no sooner,hardly提到句首,主句须倒装。

No sooner had he sat down than the phone rang.他刚坐下,电话铃就响了。

Hardly had the game begun when it started to rain.比赛刚刚开始,天就开始下起雨来。


引导条件状语从句的从属连词有:if,unless (=if...not除非),so/as long as (只要),in case (万一),on condition that (条件是),suppose/supposing (假设,如果),provided that (如果)等。

Don‘t come in unless I let you.别进来,除非我允许。

As long as you don‘t lose heart,you will succeed.只要你不灰心,你会成功的。

Suppose/Supposing (that) they refuse us,who else can we turn to for help?倘若他们拒绝我们,我们还能向谁求助呢?


原因状语从句常用because,since,as,for引导,还可用seeing that(既然),now that(既然),considering that/who/how...(考虑到……),in that(因为),not that...but that (不是因为……而是因为)等引导。 Now that they‘ve got to know each other a little better,they get along just fine.


John did quite well in his exams considering how little he studied.考虑到约翰才学了那么一点点,他考得已很不错了。

The situation is rather complicated in that we have two managing directors.由于我们有两位总经理,所以情况很复杂。


让步状语从句由though(although),even if(even though),no matter how/where/what...,whatever,however,whoever等引导。

Although the car is old,it still runs well.汽车虽然很旧,但跑起来仍然不错。

No matter how hard he tried,he couldn‘t get her to change her mind.不管他怎样努力劝说,也没能使她改变主意。


目的状语从句常由that,so that,in order that,lest(以免,以防),for fear that等引导,放在主句之后。目的状语从句常用情态动词may(might),can(could)等。lest,for fear that后面常用―(should)+动词原形‖的虚拟语气。We pray that he may recover soon.我们祈求他早日康复。


结果状语从句由so that,so...that,such that,such...that等词引导。

Many contestants later failed drug tests,so that the race had to be rerun.许多参赛者后来都没有通过药检,赛跑只得重新进行。The nature of the job was such that he felt obliged to tell no one about it.这种工作的性质就是如此,他觉得只好秘而不宣了。


( )1.—Shall we have our picnic tomorrow? —________it doesn‘t rain.

A.Until B.While C.Once D.If

( )2.She had just finished her homework ____her mother asked her to practice playing the piano yesterday. 76

A.when B.while C.after D.since

( )3.The medicine works more effectively(反应) ________you drink some hot water after taking it.

A.as B.until C.although D.if

( )4.Peter was so excited ________he received an invitation from his friend to visit Chongqing.

A.where B.that C.Why D.when

( )5. I don't know if my uncle _________. If he _________, I will be very happy.

A. comes; will come B. will come; will come C. comes; comes D. will come; comes ( )6. --- I‘m afraid the meeting has begun. --- Don‘t worry. It _____ until the bell ______.

A. doesn‘t begin / rings B. won‘t begin / will ring C. won‘t begin / rings D. doesn‘t begin / will ring ( )7. We are not sure if it _____ tomorrow. If it _____, our sports meeting will be put off.

A. will rain; rains B. rains; will rain C. will rain; will rain

( )8. Tim didn‘t have dinner ________ he finished watching the cartoon.(卡通)

A. while B. unless C. until D. since

( )9. _______ many children like sugar, I think they had better try not to eat it too often.

A. Because B. When C. Although D. If

( )10. ______ he is only 8 years old, he knows more about science than his father.

A. But B. Though C. So D. Because

( )11. I‘m waiting for my friend. ______, I‘ll go shopping alone.

A. If she comes B. If she will come C. If she doesn‘t come D. If she didn‘t come



( )1.Where __________ you born? A.did B.had C.was D.were

( )2.Do you enjoy working? Yes, I do.I like __________. A.busy B.very much C.keeping busy D.busy ( )3.May I ask you __________ questions? A.a little B.any C.some D.a

( )4.Last night my father __________ home very late. A.reached B.gets C.reached to D.got to

( )5.When Jim was a child , they __________ to France. A.lived B.worked C.reached


( )6.—_____ go and see the baby pandas? —Good idea. A.Let's B.Can you C.Shall we D.Do we ( )7.—Happy New Year! —____.A.OK. B.How do you do? C.The same to you D.How are you? ( )8.—How often are you ill? —___. A.Last week B.Sometimes C.Three days D.Less than a week ( )9.Wei Hua __________ a busy day yesterday. A.has B.had C.was D.have

( )10.When ____ you come here? We ___ here last week.A.do;come B.do;came C.did;came D.did;come


Roberto Clemente was a great basketball player, in fact, he was a star.He could jump to catch a ball.He could run fast .And he could hit a ball hard.

Roberto Clemente loved children.He wanted to build a park for the children of Puerto Rico.

In 1972, Roberto was killed in an airplane,but people did not forget him.They sent money for the park.In 1975, the park was opened.Roberto Clemente's dream had come true.


1.baseball 棒球 2.dream 梦想3.come true 实现

Comprehension questions:

( )1.Roberto Clemente was killed in __________. A.a car B.a baseball game C.an airplane ( )2.This story tells about __________.

A.a kind baseball star B.Roberto Clemente's team C.poor children

( )3.In the first part of the story, what does the word ―great‖ mean? A.huge B.old C.very, very good ( )4.Roberto Clemente wanted to build a park because he __________.

A.wanted to play baseball B.loved children C.was killed

( )5.You can guess from the story that people __________ Roberto Clemente's dream.

A.fought B.believed in C.didn't like

unit 10 I’m going to be a basketball player

【1】有些词后接动名词:practice, enjoy, spend, finish, feel like, have fun, give up, be busy

( )1. When did you finish________? A. read B. to read C. reading


( )2. –Bob speaks Chinise quite well. – Yes , so he does . He practices ___ Chinese every day.

A. speaking B. speak C. speaks D. spoke.

【2】keep+形容词=stay+形容词 意思是―保持…..‖。keep sb./sth. +形容词 意思是―使某人或某物保持某种状态‖。 Keep sb. doing sth. 意思是―使某人一直做某事‖。Keep doing sth.一直做某事。

1.It‘s hot outside. Please keep the window_________( open)

2.They are going to take more exercise to keep____________(health)

3.Please remember to keep____________( smile) every day.

4. I‘m sorry to keep you ____________( stay) outside.

5.keep ____________( quiet) in the reading room.

【3】决定做某事:make a resolution to dosth.或resolve to do sth.或decide to do sth.



( )1. Are your going to ________an English teacher when you grow up? A. be B. are C. do D. did

( )2. If you want to become a basketball player, you must ________ it really hard.

A. study B. ride C. practice D. do

( )3. I‘d like to have _____________.

A. English anything B. anything English C. English something D. something English

( )4. He‘s going to do _______ he wants to do . A. how B. what C. when D. where

( )5. She wants to buy a beautiful house ________the money. A. for B. with C. use D. about

( )6. In China , one person usually _______everyone when they eat together in a restaurant.

A. pay for B. paid to C. pays for D. pay to

( )7. The train ______ arrive on time. A. may be B. maybe C. may D. be

( )8.The doctor told him _______.

A. to have more vegetables B. to have more vegetable C. to have a little vegetable D. to have two breads

( )9. Eating with your left hand is very ______ in India! A. interesting B. important C. rude D. happy

( )10. Good waiters can earn _______ money. A. many B. a few C. a little D. a lot of

2. The boys enjoy ______________________TV very much.

3. My father ______________to China one year ago because he found a job there.

4. If you like music you may _______________ guitar lessons.

5. What are you going to do when you_________________?

6. Western people don‘t usually ____________________ the same dishes.

7. __________________ the bill is different in different countries.

8. I want to listen to music .Could you ________________ on the radio for me?

9. The Smiths ___________________ Shanghai last month.

10. Don‘t ______________________ in class!


对话提示:Robin 告诉她的朋友它要努力学习, 长大后要在西安或南京做一位英语老师, 并说她去年参观过南京。

A: Robin , what are you going to be when you (1)_______ (2)_________?

B: I‘m going to be (3)________(4)_________ teacher.

A: How are you going to do that?

B: I‘m going to (5)___________(6)___________.

A: Where are you going to work?

B: I‘m not sure (7)________. Maybe Xi‘an (8)___________Nanjing .

A: (9)_________did you (10)____________ Nanjing?

B: Last year.

A: Sound interesting . I‘m going to get lots of exercise.

Unit 11

Could you please clean your room?

【1】It takes sb. some time to do sth. 花费某人多长时间做某事。

( )1.I_________What I said just now. A. take off B. took out C. take back

( )2. I don‘t need these books . Please __________‘

A. take them away B. take away them C. take it back D. take back it.


【2】borrow, lend, keep 的用法:

( )1. You can____ my books, but you can‘t ____ them to others

A. borrow, borrow B. borrow, lend C. lend, borrow

( )2. Can I _____ this book for two days. A. borrow B. lend C. keep

( )3. I have an old book. I want to _____ a new one _____ the library.

A. lend, to B. borrow, from C. keep, to

【3】agree with sb.同意某人的意见(看法) agree to sth. 同意某事agree to do sth.同意做某事 agree on +表示具体协议的文件、计划、行动的词

【4】feed sth. to sb. / sth. =feed sb./ sth. with /on sth.用….喂某人或某物 feed on ―以…..为食‖。主语是物,如果主语是人应用live on , be fed with

( )1.You can‘t feed the food____ the animals when you visit the zoo. A. on B. with C. to

( )2. I _____ the cat with meat this morning. A. feed B. fed C. feeded

【5】be sure of sb./ sth. 主语是人,主语感到 ―有把握,确信‖与―be sure that +句子‖相同。

Be sure (not) to do sth. 一定(不)做某事



( )1. —What a dirty room! You shouldn't throw your waste things everywhere.

—Oh, I am sorry, I am going to ________ and put them in the waste box.

A. fold my clothes B. take out the trash C. watch TV

( )2. —Could you please go to the movies with me tonight?

—Sorry, my mother is ill in bed, and I have to ________ her.

A. take care of B. take a walk with C. take over

( )3. Don't _________ the dog. it's dangerous, it'll bite you. A. play with B. play C. play for ( )4. —Jim, come out. Let's go to play football.—Sorry. I'm _______ a maths problem.

A. working out B. working on C. working for

( )5. —Mum, Could I go shopping with you?—Yes, _____ But you have to finish your homework first.

A. you can B. you could C. you can't

( )6. My mother often ________ my little sister _________ of the house and plays with her in the garden.

A. take...out B. takes...out C. takes ... to

( )7. I _________ doing the dishes because it's boring. A. hates B. hate C. like

( )8. I _________ some money from him, but I'll _______ it to him in a few days.

A. borrow, return B. lend, borrow C. borrow, keep

( )9. __ the young trees is our duty. A. Taking good care of B. Take good care of C. Takes good care of



We all know that there are many pyramids (金字塔) in Egypt (埃及), but most of us don't know the people of Mexico(墨西哥)in the old times also built pyramids. They did not build the pyramids for tombs(坟墓). They built a pyramid and they built a temple(庙)on top of it. The pyramids of Mexico are not as high as those in Egypt, but they are big. Each pyramid has a wide stairway(楼梯)that goes from the bottom(底部)to the top. There is nothing inside the pyramid, only earth and stone.

Scientists think it took 10,000 men more than ten years to build the great pyramid Teochuacan(特奥帝瓦坎). It's 2,000 years old. On the top they built a temple to the sun. The temple is no longer there. How did the people of old times build the pyramids? No one knows.


( )1. There are many pyramids in Mexico, too.

( )2. People in Mexico invited people in Egypt to build the pyramids for them.

( )3. The pyramids in Mexico are higher than those in Egypt.

( )4. There are some old tombs inside the pyramids in Mexico.

( )5. Scientists don't know how the people of old times build the pyramids in Egypt, either.




I hope you're well. I'm on holiday in London with my friend Jenny. We arrived by plane last Monday and took a taxi to our hotel. I went for a walk in Hyde Park but Jenny didn't come with me because she was tired.

Then on Tuesday we saw the clock, Big Ben, and Buckingham Palace. Queen Elizabeth lives in the Palace, but 79

we didn't see her! I bought some presents but Jenny didn't buy anything!

The next day we visited the British Museum and had dinner in a Chinese restaurant!

On Thursday morning we relaxed. Then we went to Tower Bridge on the River Thames and looked at the city. It's very big!

Finally today I did some shopping and Jenny listened to a concert in the park. I came back to the hotel and read the newspaper. Then I wrote some postcards and sent some emails. I took lots of photos and I'm sending them with this email to you!

Tomorrow we're going to fly home. It was a short holiday, but it was great! Say hello to Mum and Dad. Love,


( )1. They arrived last Sunday.

( )2. They went for a walk in Hyde Park.

( )3. They bought lots of presents.

( )4. On Wednesday they saw Big Ben and Buckingham Palace.

( )5. On Thursday they saw the River Thames and visited Tower Bridge.

( )6. Today they spent the day at the hotel.

( )7. She did some shopping on Friday.

( )8. Jenny went for a walk in the park.



It was Christmas, and there was a big party in the house. Guests (客人) come and went, but the party went on. Then the bell rang. Several people shouted, "Come in!" A small man open the front door and came in. Nobody knew him but the host (主人) went to meet him and took him to have a drink. The man sat there happily for an hour and a half and drank. Then suddenly (突然) he stopped and looked at the host. "Do you know?" he said. "Nobody asked me to this party. I don't know you. I don't know your wife and I don't know any of your guests. My wife and I wanted to go out in our car, but one of your guests' cars was in front of our gate, so I came here to find him and my wife is waiting in our car for me to come back."


It was Christmas Day. There was a ___1___ in the room. When the well rang, the guests were ___2___ ___3___.

A short man ___4___ in. The host ___5___ him to ___6___ a ___7___. The short man knew ___8___ of the people. He came to the house to ___9___ a man, the man's car was in front of his car. The short man's wife was ____10____ in their car, perhaps she got very angry.


There is a park near my home. But I don't go there very often. One afternoon I went into ___1___ and found it was really small. In the park, there were two different ways. One was wide and clean. There were

___2___ flowers on both sides. ___3___ was narrow (狭窄的) and dirty. Grass grew everywhere. But finally I decided to follow the dirty way.

Ah! There was a small ___4___ there. It was the most beautiful garden I had ever seen. There were trees, flowers and chairs. I thought it was ___5___ part of the park.

Many people ___6___ me that there is nothing to see in the park. Now I tell them ___7___ they follow the right way, they would feel differently. When I'm telling them ___8___ just smile at me without answering. I know they don't believe me. My trip to the park that day made me understand something about ___9___. Don't be ___10___ to choose a different way. Be brave. You may get a big surprise!

( )1. A. the school B. the park C. the zoo D. the house

( )2. A. lots of B. a lot C. much D. any

( )3. A. another B. Other C. The other D. Others

( )4. A. chair B. lake C. river D. garden

( )5. A. the best B. better C. good D. nice

( )6. A. tell B. told C. tells D. telling

( )7. A. if B. when C. after D. before

( )8. A. we B. they C. I D. you

( )9. A. study B. school C. family D. life

( )10. A. happy B. lucky C. afraid D. worried


Unit 12 what’s the best radio station?

【1】在一个范围内用in 相邻并接壤用on 相邻但示接壤用to

1.Japan is _____ the east of China. 2. the sun rises ______ the east.

3. Hainan is ______the south of China. 4. Mongolia is________ the north of China.

【2】形容词+enough to do sth. too+形容词+ to do sth.

( )1. Robots are _____ to do the same things ____ people.

A. enough clever, as B. clever enough , as c. clever enough, with

( )2. I need enough food______ ten people. A. eat B. for C. eating

( )3. He has enough money _______these clothes. A. to buy B. buy C. buying

【3】It‘s +形容词+( for sb.) to do sth.(对某人来说)做某事是怎么样的。

( )1. _____ is difficlt to do everything well. A. That B. This C. It

( )2. It‘s necessary _______ us to do homework. A. to B. for C. as



1.I‘m glad our meeting is a great __________________________( 成功)。

2. It's a long _______________________(距离)from Beijing to Fujian.

3. The computer is too expensive. I don't have _________________ (足够)money to buy it.

4.He is one of ____________________________(最滑稽) actors.

5. Doing chores at home all day is very __________________________.(单调)

6. Jasper's has the_________________________________(最友好的)service.

7. Hotels usually _____________________________ (降低它们的价格) in winter.

8. I think Cride Theatre has ______________________________(最舒适的)seats.

9. The Art Festival __________________________________(持续了大约10天).

10.Who ______________________(赢)the prize for the best performer last night?


( )1.If you do that, you‘ll feel ________ soon.

A.more healthy B.more healthier C.much healthy D.much healthier

( )2.Of all the students, Li Ming is ________ to Mr Wang.

A.close B.closer C.the closest D.the most closest

( ) 3.. Hong Kong is ___ the south of China, and Macao is ____ the west of Hong Kong.

A. in;to B. to;to C. to;in D . in;in

( ) 4. Jim is funnier than ______ in his class.

A. any other boy B. any boy C. any other boys D. all the boys

( ) 5. The weather in Beijing is colder than ________.

A. in Hefei B. Hefei C. that in Hefei D. that of Hefei

( ) 6. Kate often goes to work ______ breakfast. It's bad for her health.

A. with B. without C. on D. not have

( ) 7. -Can I ask you ______ questions? -Sure.

A. any B. much C. some D. a little

( ) 8. Most people like Jazz 107.9 FM, because it ______ very beautiful music.

A. gives B. gets C. takes D. plays

( )9. . -______ is the ticket? -It's five yuan.

A. How many B. How long C. How far D. How much

( ) 10.________‖ dull‖ a positive word or a negative word? Negative, I think.

A. Does B. Is C .Do D.are

三. 单句改错。

( )1. This is(A) his(B) the best(C) book(D).

( )2. . Mary is (A) the youngest (B) in(C) the three girls(D).

( )3. Which(A) do you like(B) best(C), this one or(D) that one?

( )4. Mike is(A) very(B) cleverer(C) than(D) Jack.

( )5. Kate draws(A) best(B) of(C) her class(D).

四. 阅读理解。.

One day Mrs Wilson took Trudy and Ben to go shopping. They went to the supermarket in the new shopping mall(购物中心)."Why do you buy things here, Mum?" Trudy asked. "Because they are cheaper than those at the corner store," Mrs Wilson said. "Help me check(检查) the prices." The Wilsons were not wealthy(富有的

) 81

and Mrs Wilson was always careful with her money. She looked carefully at the prices of things. She bought some groceries(杂货) in the supermarket. When they got home, the children said, "We don't think you saved(省) money by going to the supermarket there." "Of course I did," said Mrs Wilson, "everything was cheap there." "We know," said the children, "but we came home by taxi (出租车)because we had too much to carry. The cost(花费) of the taxi was more than the money you saved!" Mrs Wilson added(加) everything up and found her children were right. "Well done," she said, "next time we will do shopping near our home." 根据短文内容,选择正确答案。

( )1. Mrs Wilson took Trudy and Ben ______.

A. to the supermarket B. to the zoo C. to the park D. to the museum

( )2.Mrs Wilson bought things in the supermarket in the new shopping mall because ____.

A. goods there had good quality B. there were many goods

C. goods(货物) there were cheap D. goods there were expensive

( )3. Which of the following is right?

A. The Wilsons were rich and they bought a lot of things in the supermarket.

B. The Wilsons were not rich and they bought things in a cheaper supermarket.

C. The Wilsons enjoyed shopping in the shopping mall because it was large.

D. The Wilsons were poor and they seldom went shopping.

( )4.. Mrs Wilson went home ______. A. by bus B. by minibus C. by taxi D. on foot

( )5.. Mrs Wilson decided to go shopping ______next time.

A. in the shopping mall far away B. in the cheapest shop

C. in the most expensive shop D. near her home

our school last week and this is___3____we learned. Most of the students think all fast-food restaurants are good, but the KFC is the____4____in our city. It has the most creative foodand and the best___5_____. However, McDonald‘s is the cheapest ____6____ it has the funniest picture. It also___7____the most interesting music. The most__8_____ restaurant is the Pizza Hut.It has the most____9____ food and the___10_____ service.



( )1. Alan ran ________ fast _________ I couldn‘t follow him.

A. too; to B. so; that C. as; to D. very; so

( )2. —Why didn‘t you go surfing last Sunday? — _________ I had a bad headache.

A. Because B. Since C. As D. For

( )3. —It‘s time to go to bed, Wang Ming.

—Mum, I have a lot of homework to do. I won‘t go to bed _______ I finish it.

A. after B. until C. as soon as D. since

( )4. We didn‘t catch the train __________ we got up late.

A. so B. because C. until D. before

( )5. The poor man ate a big breakfast _________ he said he wasn‘t hungry.

A. since B. because C. though D. for

( )6. ________ they are brothers, they don‘t look like each other at all.

A. Because B. Although C. When D. As

( )7. Mr. Brown has worked in our school _________ he came here in 1990.

A. when B. whether C. before D. since

( )8. Mary was ________ ill ______ she got the disease that her mum had to stop working to look after her.

A. such ;if B. so; if C. such; when D. so; when

( )9. You will be late _______ you leave immediately.

A. unless B. until C. if D. or

( )10. —This dress is in last year‘s style.

—I think it still looks perfect ________ it has gone out this year.

A. so that B. even though C. as if D. ever since

( )11. John fell asleep __________ he was listening to the music.

A. after B. before C. while D. as soon as

( )12. The book was so interesting that he had read it for three hours _______ he realized it.

A. unless B. if C. after D. before


( )13. I am waiting for my friend ________, I will go swimming alone.

A. If he doesn‘t come B. If he won‘t come C. If he will come D. If he is coming

( )14. —When will you tell him the good news? —I will tell him ________.

A. as soon as he comes back B. as soon as he came back

C. as soon as he will come back D. as soon as he is coming back

( )15. You will be able to get good marks _____________________.

A. while you are doing your homework by yourself B. if you do some revision every day

C. before you begin to study hard D. until you follow your teachers‘advice

( )16. It looks _______________ to wash the clothes.

A. as if the water is dirty enough B. as if the water isn‘t clean enough

C. that the water isn‘t dirty enough D. that the water is clean enough

八年级英语(下) Unit 1 Will people have robots?


⑴ will +V. ⑵ be going to +V. ⑶ be + Ving

一般将来时的时间状语:in + 时间,in the future,next + 时间,

与tomorrow 相关的时间,this + 时间,from now on,right now,some day…

( )1. ----You will go swimming this Saturday .won‘t you ?I havt to work this Saturday.

A.Yes I will B.Yes ,I won‘t C.No, I won‘t

( )2.What do you think your life __________ next year? A. likes B. will like C. liking D. will be like

( )3.There a football match this Sunday. A.will have B.will be C.has D.is

( Will your mother be back ?----She will be back in five days .

A.How often B.How long C.How soon D.How far




Each participant may try twice.(adj.) 每个参与者可尝试两次。

Each of them has done his work.(pron.) 他们各自干了自己的工作。

Every member has a share in the profits made by the company.(adj.)



Every boy was there and each did his part. 每个男孩都出席并各尽其力。


(三)each用于两个或两个以上的人或事物;every 用于三个或三个以上的人或事物。例: The street on each side is crowded with children.每边的街上挤满孩子。

I enjoy every minute of the party. 联欢会的每一分钟我都玩得很痛快。

值得注意的是,each不可以和否定式的动词连用,例如,我们不可以说:Each did not succeed.而应说: Each failed. 表示 each的否定涵义用语是:neither,no one或 not every one.如:

Neither(or Not every one)of them was in good health.

1.There a re many shops on _____ side of the street. 2.I gave a present to ______ of her parents.

【3】Will people use money in 100 years?

―in+时间‖结构常与一般将来时连用,对其进行提问时用特殊疑问词how soon.

In和after 相同点: 这两个词后都可接时间,表示―在 … 以后‖

不同点: ⒈―in+一段时间‖表示以现在为起点的将来一段时间以后,常与将来时连用.


过去时连用. 当after后接某一时间点时,仍可用于将来时.

① It‘ll be finished _____ five minutes. ② He will go to the park ______supper.

③ I‘ll be free ______ nine o‘clock. ④ It‘s two o‘clock.I‘ll come _____ an hour.

⑤ He came here again______ five days.

【4】study at home on computer 辨析:on,in和with.

on:表示使用通讯工具、信息或传媒,乘坐交通工具等; in:使用语言文字等媒介;with

:借助具体的 83


I don‘t want to talk about it ____ the phone. Can you speak it____ English? Don‘t write it ______ a red pen.

【5】live to be +基数词+years old 活到…岁,live on sth. 靠….为生,live on sb. 靠某人过活,live by…靠…(手段)谋生。live in+地点 住在某地,live on+楼层 住在某层楼。

1.He died when he lived ___________ ______________ 102 years old.

2.She ____________ _____________ her father.

3.The old man ________________ ______________ picking the rubbish.

4.He lives ________________ the fifth floor.

【6】fewer与less相同点: 这两个词后都是比较级,均可表示“较少的”

不同点: ⒈fewer是few的比较级,只能修饰可数名词的复数.


①I earn ______ money than my sister. ②There are ______ cars parked outside than yesterday.

③We have _____ students this year than last year. ④You ought to smoke ______ cigarettes and drink _____ beer

【7】interest be interested in , interesting interested

The ________ people _____ ________ ____ the ________story.

【8】agree with sb.同意某人的意见。Agree to …,to后多接计划、办法、安排、决定等名词。Agree on (upon)…就…取得一致意见。

1.I quite______ _____ their suggestions. 2.I quite_______ _____ what he said.

3.They _______ ______ going there tomorrow. 4.I ______ ______ the plan.

【9】because 与 because of

Li Ming didn't go out for a walk______ ______ the rain.

Li Ming won't go to the meeting_______________ he is ill.



1. alone 用作形容词,通常只是表示客观上的一个人或没有外人,而不表示寂寞或孤独等感情色彩,并且在句中只用作表语。如:He doesn?t feel lonely when he is alone. 他一个人时不感到寂寞。

I want to be alone with Mary. 我想与玛丽单独在一起。


lone 表示―孤单的‖、―单独的‖、―无伴的‖等,通常只用作定语,有时可与表示类似意义的 lonely 换用。如:a lone house in the field 田野中的孤屋 a lone [lonely] traveller 无伴的旅行者

但是 lone 一般不表示―寂寞的‖、―偏僻的‖等义。


lonely 表示―寂寞的‖、―孤寂的‖,带有较强感情色彩,相当于 sad because one lacks friends or

companions,可用来说明人,也可用来说明 life, days, years 等; 可用作表语或定语。如: He has been very lonely since his wife left him. 自他妻子离开他后,他一直感到很寂寞。

The story is about a lonely old man and his dog. 这个故事讲的是一个寂寞的老人和他的狗。

Hers is a lonely life. 她的生活很寂寞。

若不带感情色彩,只是表示―孤单的‖、―没有伴侣‖,则通常只用作定语。如a lonely traveler 孤单的旅客 He lives a lonely life in the tree farm. 他在林场里过着孤单的生活。


He was taken to a lonely island. 他被带到了一个荒岛上。

Antarctica is the loneliest place on earth. 南极是地球上最偏远的地区。

The old lady lives _____, but she doesn‘t feel ________.

【11】keep(kept/kept)---sweep---sleep keep doing sth. Keep+ n.+adj. Keep healthy/off/fit/up with.

我们必须保持教室的清洁。We must ____ the classroom ______.

他让我在学校大门口等。He ______ me ________ at the school gate.

【12】wear(wore/worn) put on(take off) in on dress

( )1.The boy a white jacket is waiting at the bus stop. A.on B.in C.of D.for

( ) 2.Jim bought a golden watch for his girl friend and now she it to work every day.

A.puts on B.dresses C.wears D.has

( )3. She A.put on B.dressed C.wore D.had

( )4. . A.put on B.dress C.wear D.have

【13】 状语从句中注意:before, after, as soon as, not…. Until, if 引导的:主将从现

( )1..After you get to Beijing, please _________. A. call up me B. call me up C. call up I D. call I up 84

( )2. If you are late for class, the teacher ______ angry. A .is B. was C. will D. will be

( )3.If you watch TV now, you ______ the homework tonight.

A. don‘ t finish B. won‘ t finish C. didn‘t finish D. aren‘t finish

( )4. There are about five ____ young trees on the hill.A. hundred B. hundreds C. hundred of D. hundreds of

( )5.----Would you like to go shopping with me ? ----I‘d love to ,I can‘t ,I‘m very busy.

A.or B.but C.however D.and

( time to read papers.

A.little B.few C.a little D.a few

( glasses.

A.few , put on B.few , wear C.a few , put on D.a few , wear

( than I. A.more angrily B.much angrier C.more angry D.very angry


1、so + 形容词/副词 + that + 从句,如:

This story is so interesting that I want to read it again. (这个故事如此有趣以至我想再读一次。) He spoke so quickly that I couldn't follow him.


2、so+形容词/副词+(a/an)+(单数)复数可数名词/不可数名词+that+从句,如果句中的名词是单数可数名词,其前就要用不定冠词a或an,如果是复数可数名词或者不可数名词,前面就不用冠词,如: She is so lovely a girl that everyone loves he(这个故事如此有趣以至我想再读一次。)r.


Those are so beautiful flowers that the girl wants to pick them.(那些花是如此漂亮以至那个女孩想要摘下它们。)


She is such a lovely girl that everyone loves her.(她是如此可爱的一个女孩,以至每个人都喜欢她。) It is such an interesting story that I want to read it again. (这是一个如此有趣的故事以至我想再读一次。)


He showed such concern that people took him to be a relative.(他表现得如此关心以致于人们都把他当作亲戚了。)

比较so和 such

其规律由so与such的不同词性决定。such 是形容词,修饰名词或名词词组,so是副词,只能修饰形容词或副词。so 还可与表示数量的形容词many,few,much, little连用,形成固定搭配。

so + adj. such + a(n) + n.

so + adj. + a(n) + n. such + n. (pl.)

so + adj. + n. (pl.) such +n. (pl.)

so + adj. + n. [不可数] such +n. [不可数]

so foolish such a fool

so nice a flower such a nice flower

so many/ few flowers such nice flowers

so much/little money. such rapid progress

so many people such a lot of people

so many 已成固定搭配,a lot of 虽相当于 many,但 a lot of 为名词性的,只能用such搭配。 so…that与such…that之间的转换既为 so与such之间的转换。


1. he was_______excited that he couldn't get sleep

2. this teacher is_________kind that we all like him

3. he ran____________quickly that we all couldn't catch up with him

4. this is___________interesting a book that we all ebjoy reading it

5. they are_________intereting books that we all enjoy reading them

6. he has________many books that I can't count them

7. this is________ an interesting book that we all enjoy reading it

8. there was __________much food that we couldn't eat it all

9. I have_____________little money that I cannot afford a car

10. he is ________________a good student that we alll like him.

11. he is _______________good a student that we alll like him.

12. it was ____________bad weather that he had to stay at home.


13. I've had ____________many falls than i'm blick and blue all over



( )1. —Will there be more people in 100 years, do you think? —_____,I hope.

A. No, there isn‘t B. No, there aren‘t C. No, there won‘t D. No, they won‘t.

( )2.If there are _____trees, the air in our city will be _____ cleaner.

A. less; more B. more; more C. more; much D. much; more

( )3. I predict he will be an engineer _____ten years because he is so interested in making things.

A. in B. after C. later D. for

( )4. There were many famous predictions that never_____.

A. come true B. came real C. came true D. be true

( )5. How many people _______there fifty years ago. A. will B. were C. are D. will be

( )6. —I think that China will win the World Cup one day.

—I_______. The Chinese team is becoming stronger and stronger.

A. agree B. disagree C. am not agree D. think

( )7. You must run fast. The train _______________ in two minutes.

A. go B. went C. will go D. goes

( )8. What will the weather ______________ tomorrow?

A. like B. to like C. to be like D. be like

( )9. ___________ boy will win the first prize, can you guess?

A. Why B. Which C. Who D. What

( )10.My friends _________ a pet pig in their house. A. keeps B. feeds C. keep D. look

二、完形填空 The Internet is many different networks around the world. A network is a group of computers put together. These networks joined together are called the Internet.

that doesn‘t sound interesting. But _can have a lot of on the World Web.(www). We can use the Internet, instead of (而不是 our favorite sports or film stars and do shopping on the Internet. We can send e-mail. It‘s much cheaper and quicker than our friends or sending a letter. Thanks to the Internet, the world is becoming smaller and smaller. People can now work at home with a computer in front, getting and sending the information they need. They can buy or sell whatever they want by the ( ) 1. A. a lot of B. a lot C. a few D. a little of

( ) 2. A. May B. But C. And D. Maybe

( ) 3. A. where B. when C. however D. although

( ) 4. A. lots of B. a lot C. much D. few

( ) 5. A. interesting B. friends C. interest D. funny

( ) 6. A. find B. look for C. find out D. look after

( ) 7. A. with B. for C. on D. about

( ) 8. A. with B. by C. on D. for

( ) 9. A. call B. called C. calls D. calling

( ) 10. A. on B. with C. in D. for

三 阅读理解

Swimming is very popular in summer. People like swimming in summer because water makes them feel cool. If you swim in a wrong place, it may not be safe. These years, more than ten people died in this city while they were enjoying in the water and most of them were students. But some people are still not careful in swimming. They often think they swim so well that nothing can happen to them in water. Summer is here again. If you go swimming, don‘t forget that better swimmers have died in water. They died because they were not careful, not because they were not good at swimming. So don‘t get into water when you are alone. If there is a ―No swimming‖ sign, don‘t get into water, either. If you remember all this, swimming will be safer.


( )1. Swimming is a very safe sport.

( )2. We shouldn‘t swim in some wrong places.

( )3. Only students died in water.

( )4. If you are good at swimming, you will not died in water.

( )5. If we often practice swimming, we will be safer.


【1】Sb. pay …for sth. 某人为某物花了…钱。 Sth. cost sb. … 某物花了某人…钱。 Sb. spend …




【2】Play n. & v. play the+乐器, play+球类, play his CDs

【3】enough+n. Adj/adv+ enough enough to=so---that+肯定句

I don‘t have enough money

( )1.Peter is ten years old. He is _________ to go to school.

A. old enough B. enough old C. young enough D. enough young

( )2. Peter is ____ old _____ he can go to school.

A. too, to B. so, that C. enough, to D. so that, to

【4】 advice 不可数名词

( ) Mrs. Wang gave us________ on how to learn English well.

A. some advices B. a few advice C. a little advices D. much advice

【5】.surprise 与 be surprised

She ____ ________ that he can catch the mouse. I don‘t want _________ _______him.


----No, you I need to get some money to pay for summer camp.

【7】.pay for(paid /paid) sb.pay somemoney for sth

spend(spent /spent) sb spend time /money in doing sth.(on sth.)

take(took/taken) It takes sb. sometime to do sth.

cost(cost/cost) sth. cost sb. somemoney

( )1. ----What a nice MP4,Is It yours ? ----Of course ,I A.cost B.spent C.paid

( A.spent B.paid C.cost D.used

【8】.buy (bought/bought)—brought. Buy sth. for sb.

Please buy a bottle of water for her----please buy her a bottle of water.

【9】.except ---besides

except除了……之外,没有All the students passed the test except Jenny.

besides除了……还有 What have you done ,besides doing your homework and watching TV

【10】.I argue with my best friend.

( )They don't like Tom. He often argues _________ others.

A. on B. from C. with D. to

【11】.I think you should ask your parents for some money. Ask sb.for sth.

He went to ask the policeman for help.

( help when you are in trouble , so you needn‘t worry.

A.play for B.pay for C.ask for

Ask sb.(not)to do sth.要求某人(不)做某事。Ask for leave 请假 ask for trouble 自找麻烦

【12】not….until 直到…..才。

----It‘s time to go to bed ,Mary. --Oh ,Mum ,I won‘t go to bed A.after B.since C.until D.as soon as

I wited for her until six o‘clock.

【13】.It‘s time for sth. it‘s time to do sth it‘s time for sb. to do sth.

It time for homework. It‘s time to have beakfast. It‘s time for us to go home .

【14】.Parents see other children doing a lot of things.

see(hear/find /watch ) sb. doing sth see(hear/find /watch ) sb do sth.

( ) When they went into the park ,they saw someone Chinese Kongfu.

A.plays B.played C.to play D.playing

【15】.They may find it difficult to plan things for themselves.

Find it +adj+(for sb.) to do sth.

I find it easy for me to get on with him.

( )She finds _________ hard to finish the work in two days.

87 Unit 2 What should I do?

A. it B. that C. this D. its



( )1.My parents want me _____at home every night A. stay B. staying C. to stay D. staies

( )2.I argue ______ my best friend A .with B. about C. at D. and

( )3.He doesn‘t have any money , ______. A. either B. too C. also D. but

( )4. My friend _____the same clothes . A. wear B. wears C. put on D. puts on

( )5.Could you give me _____ advice A. some B. any C. many D. a lot

( )6.My friend is angry with me . What should I _____to him ? A . say B. speak C. argue D. talk

( )7.He could do nothing except_____ TV. A. watch B. watches C. watching D. will watch

( )8.Please ______ who broke the window . A. find out B. find C. look for D. look out

( )9.He _____ the pen on the ground just now A. droped B. dropped C. falls D. fell

( )!0. He‘s used to _____ in the afternoon . A. play B. plays C. playing D. played

( )11. Maybe he put it in his pocket , ______ he ? A. does B. doesn‘t C. did D. didn‘t

( )12. The boy is ___to go to school . A. enough old B. enough young C. old enough D. young enough

( )13.Please show me the ticket ______the concert A. of B. for C. to D .on

( )14.I need to get some money to _____the summer camp . A . pay on B. pay in C. pay with D. pay for

( )15.When I arrived home , I remembered that I ______ my key in the classroom .

A. forget B. forgot C. leave D. left

( )16. They are ______ the summer holiday .A. planning B. planing C. planned D. plans

( )17. I ______ it everywhere , but I didn‘t _____ it .

A . looked for , looked for B. looked for , find C. found , looked for D. find , look for

( )18.Our teacher often tells us ___ to the old politely . A. speak B .speaking C. to speak D. speak in

( )19.I really don‘t know ______. A. what should I do B. what to do C. what does D. what doing

( )20. They are good friends , but sometimes they _each other . A. argue of B. argue C. argue to D. argue with

二 用所给动词的正确形式填空

1. You should ____________(go) to see a doctor. 2. Mother asked me ________________(get) up early.

3. They are ____________________(plan) how to spend the summer holiday.

4. Let‘s __________________(try) our best to make our world more beautiful.

5. He __________________________(leave) his bag at school yesterday.


1.这种款式的女装,现在正流行。This style of dress _________ _______ _________ now.

2.我不喜欢这部电脑,已经过时了。I don‘t like this computer, it‘s _______ _________ _________.

3.同学之间不能相互吵架。 The students shouldn‘t __________ _________ __________ ___________.

4.如果你有什么需要问我的,请给我打电话。If you have something to ask me, please _____ ______ _______.

5.也许你可以给他一张球票。 Maybe you could _________ him _______ _________ ________ a ball game.

6. 我不想在电话上谈这事。 I don‘t want to talk about it _________ ________ __________.

三. 完型填空

A generous gap(代沟) has become a serious problem. I read a about it in the newspaper. Some children have killed themselves after with parents. I think this is because they don‘t often have a talk with each other. Parents now more time in the office, they don‘t have much time to stay with their children. As times passes, they both feel that they don‘t have the 题目) to talk about. I want to tell to your parents. They are the people who love you. So have a better understanding of each other.

( ) 1.A. message B. call C. report D. letter

( ) 2. A. talk B. argue C. fight D. play

( ) 3. A. spend B. stay C. work D. have

( ) 4. A. because B. if C. but D. so

( ) 5. A. interesting B. same C. true D. good

( ) 6. A. business B. children C. work D. office

( ) 7. A. get on well with B. look after C. understand D. love

( ) 8. A. interest B. secret C. trouble D. feelings

( ) 9. A. tell B. ask C. answer D. say

( ) 10. A. can B. should C. must D. would

四. 阅读理解

Part A


Japanese students work very hard, but many are unhappy. They feel heavy pressure from their parents to do well in school. Most students are always being told by their parents to study harder so that they can have a wonderful life. Though this may be a good idea for those very smart students, it can have terrible results for many students because they are not talented enough.

As it is reported, a number of students killed themselves. Others try to get the feelings of taking drugs(毒品). Some join the groups of troublemakers and turn to crime(犯罪). Many of them have tried very hard at school but have failed in the exams and have their parents lose hopes. Such students felt that they are hated by everyone else they meet and they don‘t want to go to school any longer.

It is surprising that though most Japanese parents are worried about their children, they do not help them in any ways .Many parents feel that they are not able to help their children and it is the teachers‘ work to help their children. To make matter worse, a lot of parents send their children to those school opening in the evenings and on weekends— they only help students to pass exams and never teach students any real sense of the world. It is a great surprise that almost three quarters of middle school students have been to such kind of schools. Many Japanese schools usually have rules about everything from the students‘ hair to their clothes and the things in their bags. Child psychologists (儿童心理学家)now think that such strict rules are harmful (有害的)to the feelings of the students. Almost 40% of the students said that no one had taught them how to get on with others, how to tell right from wrong, how to show love for others, even for their parents.

( )1.Why do the Japanese student feel unhappy?

A. Because they don‘t work hard enough B. Because their parents give them little pressure

C. Because they can‘t do well in their schoolwork.

D. Because their parents want them to do well in school, it give them much pressure.

( )2. Their parents want them to study hard because ______________

A. their parents want to have a wonderful life B. they want their kids to have a wonderful life in the future.

C. they can‘t do well in their own work. D. the kids wants to have a wonderful life.

( )3. Why a lot of teenagers killed themselves or did something criminal?

A. Because they like to do that. B. Because they thought their parents didn‘t love them any more.

C. Because they thought everyone hated them. D. Both B and C.

( )4. Who do the parents think should help the kids when they can‘t do well in school work?

A. Teachers. B. Parents. C. Someone else. D. Their classmates.

( )5. What do child psychologists think is harmful to the feelings of children?

A. Schools have too much rules about everything. B. The parents don‘t help their children.

C. Children can‘t do well in their school work.

D. Parents send their children to all kinds of school which are opening on weekends.

Part B.

Expert(专家) say that students usually need eight to ten hours‘ sleep at night, but most Chinese students do not get enough sleep. Some Chinese parents are usually glad to see their children studying late. They will think their children work very hard, but not all parents are happy about this. Once a mother told us tat every morning her 10-year-old boy put up one finger (手指)with his eyes still closed, begging(请求) for one more minute to sleep. Like thousands of students ― early birds‖ in China, he has to get up before six every morning.

A report shows that without a good night‘s sleep, students seem to be weaker (虚弱)than they should be. Many students have fallen asleep during class at one time or another. Too much homework is not the only reason why students stay up late. Some watch TV or play the computer games late into the night.

Experts have ever said that the students should develop good study habits. So some clever students never study last, they are able to work well in class.

( ) 1. The 10-year-old boy begged for more minute to sleep because__________

A. he didn‘t have enough sleep B. it wasn‘t time for him to get up

C. he didn‘t want to go to school D. he wanted his mother to wake him up

( ) 2. In this passage we know if students don‘t get enough sleep, they may________

A. become too weak to sleep B. not work well in class

C. go to bed early D. be weak in English

( )3. In this passage ―early birds‖ means ―persons who ______________‖

A. get up early B. get up late C. sleep less D. don‘t want to sleep

( )4. ―Stay up late‖ here means ―_____________‖

A. study late B. watch TV late C. not go to bed until late D. stay outside

( )5. According to the passage, which of the following is right?_________

A. If you want to study better, you must work hard at night. B. Sleeping less means working hard.

C. Some clever students are able to work well in class because they have good study habits.

D. Students don‘t have enough sleep because they have lots of homework to do.


Unit3 What were you doing when the UFO arrived?



⑵谓语结构:be ( was, were )+ Ving

⑶时间状语:at that time/moment at + 点钟 + yesterday/last night

from +点钟 + to +点钟 + yesterday this time yesterday

just then when he came in, ….(when引导的时间状语从句是过去时,并且动词是短暂性动词时,主句使用过去进行时)

【2】while/when /as 当……的时候


when 可与一个点的时间或表示一段的时间连用,从句动词可以是短暂性或延续性动词;

while 只指一段时间,不能指一点时间。因此while从句中的谓语动词必须是延续性动词。

When/While I was cleaning the classroom , the teacher came in .

When I got home , my mother was cooking.

He was looking through a magazine as he was waiting for the train.

【3】―as + 形容词/副词的原级+as‖表示―和…一样‖

否定形式:―not as/so + 形容词/副词的原级+as‖ 表示―和…不一样‖

【4】take off/away/out//care of /a walk

take the bus /train/ He took the bus to QiLing Park .

It takes Sb. sometime to do Sth.

【5】.Die—dying ---died—dead( be dead )

( )Lei Fong has for more than fifty years.

A.die B.been dying C.been dead D.died

【6】.thingk about 思考、考虑 think of认为、想起 think over 仔细考虑

( )1. This is a good idea ,Please A.think it about B.think about it C.thinking it D.thinks it

( )2. What do you A. think for B.think of C.thing about D.think

【7】.everyday everyday Enlish everyday activities

( )The Internet has become part of A.every day B.everyday C.every days D.everydays

【8】.take place----happen

The story took place in a village long long ago.

What happen to him? When did the accident happen?

【9】.How strange it was 感叹句

How+adj/adv+主语+谓语。How heavily it is raining。How interesting the story is !


What an interesting story it is !



( )1. What ___ you ___ when she came in? A. did, do B. are, doing C. do, do D. were, doing

( )2. The girl is ill. She‘s ______. A. in hospital B. in the hospital C. at hospital D. at the hospital

( )3. The patients (病人)are waiting __. A. at the doctor B. at the doctor‘s C. in the doctor D. in doctor‘s ( )4. Where was Davy ______ Linda was looking for him? A. that B. while C. at D. where ( )5. They are thinking about _______ the poor children. A. help B. to help C. helping D. helps ( )6. The woman couldn‘t see her son ________. She‘s very worried.

A. anywhere B. somewhere C. nowhere D. where

( )7. They are talking about something ______ the telephone. A. in B. on C. at D. for

( )8. We were very ____ that Jim didn‘t pass the exam. A. surprise B. surprising C. surprised D. surprises ( )9. Just now she saw the man ________ into the room. A. go B. went C. goes D. to go

( )10. There‘s a big tree ___ the building. A. in front of B. in the front of C. in front D. at the front of



1. Father _____ still ______(sleep)when I ______(get)up yesterday morning.

2. Grandma ______(cook)breakfast while I ______(wash)my face this morning.

3. Mother ______(sweep)the floor when I ______(leave)home.

4. The students ______(have)a biology class when the visitors ______(come).

5. The driver ______(drive)home when it ______(rain)last night.

6. Some students from Class Four ______(play)basketball when I ______(see)them on the playground.

7. Doctor Liu was on duty last night. He ______still ______(work)in the hospital at 10 p.m.

8. The street seller ______(sell)clothes when he ______(find)a purse on the ground.

9. Mr Wang spends a lot of time writing his novel (小说)every day. He ______still ______(work)at midnight last night. 10. I ______(read)a history book when someone ______(knock)at the door.

11. Masha ______(cook)when the doorbell______(ring).


The difference between life in one country and in 1 is quite often 2 the difference between city life and village life in 3 country. In an English 4 everybody 5 everybody else; they know what time you get up, what time you go to bed and what you usually have 6 dinner. If you want any help, you will always 7 it and be glad to help 8 in return. In a large city 9 London, there are many things to see and many places to go to. 10 people often do not know each other 11 . It 12 happens that you have 13 seen your next-door neighbor, don?t know his name or 14 about him. People living in London are often very 15 , particularly 16 . This is because the people they are with all day are scattered over large areas in the evenings and weekends. 17 you walk 18 street in London on a Sunday, it is almost like an empty town. One is 19 for old people who do not live with their 20 and have no work to go to during the day.

( )1. A. other B. others C. the other D. another

( )2. A. not so big as B. so big as C. isn?t so big as D. as big as

( )3. A. same B. the same C. different D. different

( )4. A. village B. town C. city D. country

( )5. A. needs B. knows C. helps D. calls

( )6. A. at B. for C. in D. with

( )7. A. get B. take C. bring D. pay

( )8. A. any other B. any C. anyone else D. any people

( )9. A. like B. as C. of D. in

( )10. A. So B. Then C. Though D. But

( )11. A. good B. well C. better D. best

( )12. A. sometimes B. some times C. some time D. sometime

( )13. A. ever B. had C. never D. been

( )14. A. something B. nothing C. everything D. anything

( )15. A. lonely B. happy C. angry D. tired

( )16. A. before work B. at work C. after work D. by work

( )17. A. If B. After C. Before D. Because

( )18. A. in B. through C. to D. across

( )19. A. lucky B. happy C. surprised D. sorry

( )20. A. daughters B. sons C. children D. people

Unit 4 He said I was hard-working.

really 真实存在的(人和事)

【2】 确信…汇 I don‘t think (that)… 我不认为…(否定前置)




She said. "My brother wants to go with me. "→She said her brother wanted to go with her.


―二宾‖是指直接引语变间接引语时,若从句中的主语及宾语是第二人称。或被第二人你所修饰。从句中的人称要跟引号外的主句的宾语一致。如果引号外的主句没有宾语。也可以用第一人称,如: He said to Kate. "How is your sister now?"→He asked Kate how her sister was then。


Mr Smith said。 "Jack is a good worker。"→Mr Smith said Jack was a good worker。




1)She said. "I have lost a pen."→She said she had lost a pen

2)She said. "We hope so."→She said they hoped so.

3) She said. "He will go to see his friend。"→She said he would go to see his friend。



"The earth moves around the sun and the moon moves around the earth, the teacher told me. → The teacher told me the earth moves around the sun and the moon moves around the earth。


Jack said. "John, where were you going when I met you in the street?"→Jack asked John where he was going when he met him in the street。


Xiao Wang said. "I was born on April 2l, 1980。" →Xiao Wang said he was born on April 20, 1980。 ④直接引语如果是一般现在时。表示一种反复出现或习惯性的动作,变间接引语,时态不变。如: He said, "I get up at six every morning。" →He said he gets up at six every morning。

⑤如果直接引语中的情态动词没有过去时的形式(例:ought to, had better, used to)和已经是过去时的形式时,(例:could, should, would, might)不再变。如:

Peter said. "You had better come have today。" →Peter said I had better go there that day。


直接引语变间接引语,状语变化有其内在规津,时间状语由―现在‖改为―原来(‖例:now变为then, yesterday。变为 the day before)地点状语,尤其表示方向性的,或用指示代词修饰的状语,由―此‖改为―彼‖(例:this 改为that),如:

He said, "These books are mine." →He said those books were his.


①直接引语如果是陈述句,间接引语应改为由that引导的宾语从句。如:She said, "Our bus will arrive in five minutes."→She said that their bus would arrive in five minutes.

②直接引语如果是反意疑问句,选择疑问句或一般疑问句,间接引语应改为由whether或if引导的宾语从句.如:He said, "Can you swim, John?" →He asked John if he could swim.

"You have finished the homework, haven?t you?" my mother asked. →My mother asked me whether I had finished the homework.

"Do you go to school by bus or by bike?" →He asked me if I went to school by bus or by bike.


She asked me, "When do they have their dinner?"→ She asked me when they had their dinner.

④直接引语如果是祈使句,间接引语应改为"tell(ask, order, beg等) sb (not) to do sth."句型。如:

"Don‘t make any noise," she said to the children. →She told (ordered) the children not to make any noise. "Bring me a cup of tea, please," said she.→She asked him to bring her a cup of tea.

⑤直接引语如果是以―Let?s‖开头的祈使句,变为间接引语时,通常用―suggest +动句词(或从句)。‖如:He said, "Let‘s go to the film." →He suggested going to the film.或He suggested that they should go to see the film.


John said, "I'm going to London with my father."


John said that he was going to London with his father.

约翰说,他要和他父亲去伦敦。(宾语从句是间接引语)由直接引语变为间接引语,分以下情况: 92

1. 直接引语是陈述句时

间接引语为that引导的宾语从句(口语中that可以省略),主句的引述动词主要有say ,tell, repeat, explain, think等。

He said , "You are younger than I."-'He said (that ) I was younger than him.


间接引语为陈述语序:主句的谓语动词say 改为ask,或改为wonder, do not know, want to know, be not sure, be puzzled等。

(1) 一般疑问句或反意疑问句变为if (whether)引导的宾语从句。

She said, "Do you often come here to read newspapers?"

→She asked me if (或whether)I often went there to read newspapers.

She asked me , "You have seen the film, haven't you?" →She asked me whether(或if )I had seen the film.

(2) 选择疑问句变为whether….or 宾语从句。

I asked him, "Will you stay at home or go to a film tonight?"

→I asked him whether he would stay at home or go to a film that night.


He asked , "Where do you live?" →He asked me where I lived.


间接引语为不定式,作ask , tell, beg, order, warn, advise等动词的宾语补足语(don't 变为not ). The teacher said to the boy, "Open the window."→The teacher told the boy to open the window.

His father said to him , "Don't leave the door open."→His father told him not to leave the door open.


(1) 有些表示建议、提议、劝告或要求的祈使句,可以用suggest ,insist等动词 加以转述。例如: He said, "Let's go to the theatre."

→He suggested (our )going to the theatre.或He suggested that we(should) go to the theatre.

(2) "Would you mind opening the window?" he asked. →He asked me to open the window.

"Why don't you take a walk after supper?" he asked . →he advised me to take a walk after supper. "Shall we listen to the music?" he asked. →He suggested listening to the music.


间接引语为what 或how 引导,也可以用that 引导。

She said, "What a lovely day it is !"

→She said what a lovely day it was .或She said that it was a lovely day.


(1) 一般现在时变为一般过去时

(2) 现在进行时变为过去进行时

(3) 一般将来时变为过去将来时

(4) 现在完成时变为过去完成时

(5) 一般过去时变为过去完成时

(6) 过去完成时不变,仍为过去完成时


(1) 如果直接引语是表示客观真理时,变为间接引语,一般现在时不改为一般过去时。如: The teacher said "The earth goes round the sun."

→The teacher said that the earth goes round the sun.

(2) 如果直接引语中有明确表示过时间的状语,变为间接引语时,一般过去时不改为过去完成时。如: He said to me, "I was born in 1973."

→He told me that he was born in 1973.

(3)如果直接引语所述事实在当时和目前同样生效,变为间接宾语时,一般现在时不改为一般过去时。如: He said, "I'm a boy, not a girl."

→He said that he is a boy ,not a girl.


The girl said, "I get up at six every morning."→The girl said that she gets up at six every morning.

(5)如果直接引语中含有since, when, while 引导的表示过去时间的状语从句,在变为间接引语时,只改变主句中的谓语动词,从句的一般过去时则不变。如:


He said to me, "I have taught English since he came here ." →He told me that he had taught English since he came here.

(6)如果直接引语中含有情态动词 must, need, had better以及情态动词的过去式could, might, should, would,在变为间接引语时,这些情态动词没有时态的改变。例如:

The teacher said to me . "You must pay more attention to your pronunciation." →The teacher told me that I must (have to ) pay more attention to my pronunciation. He said , "I could swim when I was only six ."

→He said that he could swim when he was only six.

( )1. He asked ________ for the computer.

A. did I pay how much B. I paid how much C. how much did I pay D. how much I paid

( )2. ―Have you seen the film?‖ he asked me. →He asked me _______.

A. had I seen the film B. have I seen the film C. if I have seen the film D. whether I had seen the film

( )3. ―Please close the window,‖ he said to me. He ______ me _____ the window.

A. said to; to close B. told to; closing C. asked ; to close D. said to; please close

( )4. ―I am a teacher,‖ Jack said. →He said _________.

A. that I am a teacher B. I was a teacher C. that he is a teacher D. he was a teacher

( )5. He said, ―Mother, the boy is very naughty.‖ →He _____- very naughty.

A. said his mother that the boy was B. said to his mother that the boy is C. told his mother that the boy was D. spoke to his mother that the boy was

( )6. ―You‘ve already got well, haven‘t you?‖ she asked.→She asked ________.

A. if I have already got well, hadn‘t you B. whether I had already got well C. have I already got well D. had I already got well.

( )7. He asked , ― Are you a Party member or a League member?‖ →He asked me _________.

A. am I a Party member or a League member B. was I a Party member or a League member

C. if I was a Party member or a League member D. whether was I a Party member or a League member.

( )8. He asked, ―How are you getting along?‖ →He asked _______.

A. how am I getting along B. how are you getting along C. how I was getting along D. how was I getting along ( )9. He asked me ________ with me.

A. what the matter is B. what the mater was C. what‘s the matter D. what was the matter

( )10. He said, ―Don‘t do that again.‖ He _____ me _______ that again.

A. said to me; not to do B. said to me; don‘t do C. told me; don‘t do D. told me; not to do

【4】.She said she had forgotten to do hers.

Forget to do/ doing sth. remember to do/ doing sth. ( )1. Don‘t forgetA.washing your hands B.wash your hands C. to wash your hands D.about washing hands ( 94

A.seeing B.seing C.to see D.see

【5】.It is +adj+ of sb. to do sth.. (kind /good clever/nice/foolish//careless表示性格特征的词)

It is very kind of you to help me .=You are very kind to help me .

It is +adj +for sb. to o sth.≠ Sb. is adj to do sth.

It is very dangerous for chidren to cross the street.

It‘s important for children to learn English well.

( ) It‘s niceA.for ; to help B.for ; helping C.of ; to help D.of; helping



( )1. He was ___________years ago. I hope he is in good ______________ now .

A. unhealthy, health B. unhealthy, healthy C. unhealth, health D. unhealth, healthy

( )2. There is no ________________ between you and me .

A. different B. difference C. difficult D. differences

( ) 3. Marcia___________ me ,but I‘m also angry __________ her .

A. mad at; with B. be mad at; with C. is mad at; at D. is mad at; with

( )4. Ben is a ________ student .

A. twelve years old B. eight-year-old C. thirteen-year-old D. eleven year old

( ) 5. I‘m better ________ English writing and also do better __________ reading than others .

A. at; at B. at; in C. in; at D. in; in

( )6. She said she ______ three languages . A. can speak B. could say C. could speak D. could talk

( ) 7. He told me he __ his bike to school tomorrow . A. rode B. will ride C. would ride D. was ride

( ) 8. _______ not right to copy ________ homework

A. That‘s , other‘s B. That‘s , others‘ C. It‘s , other‘s D. It‘s , others‘

( ) 9. . Could you please _________some snacks here ? A. take B. bring C. carry D. move

( )10. What are some things that happen _____ the soap opera ? A. to B. on C. in D. for

( )11. I found ______________ interesting . A. him B. he‘s C. he D. his

( ) 12. He said he was _________ . A. working- hard B. work hard C. hard-working D. hard working

( ) 13. Children ______________ good grades .

A. supposed to get B. suppose to get C. are supposed to get D. are supposing to get

Unit 5 If you go to the party ,you’ll have a great time!

【1】too much + 不可数名词 too many + 可数名词 much too + 形容词

【2】.join join in take part in

My father joined the party in 1989. I joined them in playing football.

( Will you us buying a birthday present for Anna?

A.join ; for B.join ; in C.join ; up D.join ; to

( )2. Will you give him a chance the important meeting ?

A.take part B.take part in C.to take part in D.to join

【3】.too much much too too many

( )1. Don‘t spend time watching TV.

A.too much B.much too C.many too D.too many

( dirty, We should clean it .

A.too much B.much too C.more much D.much more

【4】When is a good time to have the party?

It is a good time to do sth. It‘s a good time to plant the trees.

I wanted to drink a cup of coffee. (want/try /begin /hope decide to do sth.)

I‘ll tell him to turn it down . (ask sb. to do sth.)

We come to borrow some books (go/come to do sth.)

I have some homework to do . ( Would you like something to drink )

( )1. It‘s no good about your scores. A.worry B.to worry C.worried D.worrying

( )2. I‘m hungry ,Do you have something ? A.eat B.for eating C.eating D.to eat

( in bed . A.not read B.not to read C>not reading

( his friends. A.see Bseeing C.to see D.sees


have a difficult time knowing who your real friends are.


( )They have a difficult time their homework.

A.finish to B.finish doing C.finishing doing D.finishing to do

【6】Have fun doing sth. I have great fun playing in the water.



1. ______(watch)TV too much is bad for your eyes.

2. Could you tell us the ______(different)between these two styles of music?

3. They are much ______(friend)than I thought.

4. The teacher ______(take)away my mobile phone because I used it in class.

5. It rained very hard. And it made a few drivers ______(injoure)in the race.

二. 单项选择。

( )1. We‘ll go to the Summer Palace __ it doesn‘t rain this Saturday. A. when B. if C. until D. because ( )2. Don‘t ________ jeans to the party. A. put on B. wear C. wearing D. dress

( )3. I‘m going to ______ time with my grandparents this vacation. A. take B. have C. spend D. go ( )4. This book isn‘t useful. Please _______.

A. take part in B. take it away C. take away it D. take it out

( )5. Jim asked me _______ him with his math. A. help B. helping C. helped D. to help ( )6. What ____ you ______ at eight yesterday evening?

A. have, done B. did, do C. were, doing D. will, do

( )7. They found ______ they are famous for only a short time. A. it B. this C. that D. them ( )8. Could you please ____ me the way to the hospital. A. showing B. showed C. show D. shown ( )9. -I like flying all over the world. -I think being a ________ is just for you.

A. teacher B. tour guide C. policeman D. doctor

( )10. -What are you going to do tomorrow? -______.

A. Nothing much B. Much nothing C. Not anything D. No thing

三. 完形填空:



The school party will on Sept. 30th. Many students like to go to the the school principal has made many for it: the students cannot jeans to the party; the students cannot bring friends from schools; the students cannot run or shout at the . What will if they do? They will be asked to leave or they will not be let . And the students must bring their cards. they don‘t, they can‘t go to the party.


Henry left college last summer. His parents helped him 1 a job in a small town. He works in a factory there. He hopes to be the 2 of a shop (1), but the boss doesn‘t agree. The man thinks that he‘s 3 and that he has a lot to learn. The young man is not happy and doesn‘t work 4 . He plays cards with his friends in the evening and is often 5 in his office. Sometimes he is late for work. His hair is 6 and his clothes are not clean.

This morning the young man 7 the boss (2)at the gate of the factory. Seeing him, the boss 8 him and looked at him up and down. And then he told him to stand 9 the mirror (3)and said, ―Look at yourself, young man, I don‘t know if (4)you are 10 . If you are, you‘d better divorce (5)your wife. If not, you‘d better marry a wife at once! ‖

Notes: (1)shop 车间;(2)boss老板;(3)mirror 镜子;(4)if / if / 是否;(5)divorce 离婚 ( )1. A. look for B. wait for C. find D. pick

( )2. A. head B. face C. hand D. worker

( )3. A. old B. new C. strong D. healthy

( )4. A. quickly B. fast C. heavily D. hard

( )5. A. tired B. hungry C. thirsty D. exciting

( )6. A. short B. yellow C. long D. black

( )7. A. broke B. met C. called D. heard

( )8. A. helped B. saved C. hated D. stopped

( )9. A. under B. above C. in front of D. behind

( )10. A. worried B. married C. useful D. careful


四. 阅读理解:


Dreams may be more important than sleep. Some people don‘t need much sleep. But we all need to dream, scientists say.

Dreams take up about one quarter of our sleeping time. People have several dreams each night. Dreams are like short films. They are usually in color. Some dreams are like old films. They come to us over and over again. That may be because the dreamer is worrying about something. Dreaming may be a way of trying to find an answer.

Some people get new ideas about their work from dreams. They could have been thinking about their work all day. These thoughts can carry over into dreams.

Sometimes we wake up with a good feeling from a dream. But often we can‘t remember the dream. Dreams can disappear quickly from memory.

Too much dreaming can be harmful. The more we sleep, the longer we dream. The mind is hard at working when we dream. That is why we may have a long sleep and still wake up tired.

( )1. It may be less important to sleep than to _______. A. think B. dream C. work D. study ( )2. Dreams and films are usually ______. A. very long B. in color C. about work D. very sad ( )3. The people often dream about their work because _______.

A. they are tired in the daytime B. they are not interested in their work

C. they may be thinking about their work at all D. they have too much work to do

( )4. The main idea of the story is that _______.

A. people need to dream B. people like to sleep C. dreams are like films D. we always remember dreams ( )5. The title for the story could be ______. A. Terrible dreams B. The longest sleep C. Memory D. Dreams


Before you go to another country it is a great help if you know the language and some of the customs of the country.

When people meet each other for the first time in Britain, they say, ―How do you do? ‖and shake hands. Usually they do not shake hands when they just meet or say goodbye. But they shake hands after they haven‘t met for a long time or when they will be away from each other for a long time.

Last year a group of German students went to England for a holiday. Their teacher told them that the English people hardly shake hands. So when they met their English friends at the station, they kept their hands behind their backs. The English students had learned that the Germans shake hands as often as possible, so they put their hands in front and got ready to shake hands with them. It made both of them laugh.

( )1. It is ______ if you know the language and some of the customs of the country.

A. not useful B. not helpful C. very helpful D. very bad

( )2. English people usually shake hands when they ______.

A. meet every time B. meet for the first time C. say goodbye to each other D. say hello to each other ( )3. Usually English people don‘t shake hands _______.

A. when they will be away for a long time B. when they say ―How do you do? ‖

C. when they just meet or say goodbye D. after they haven‘t met for a long time

( )4. Which of the statement is right?

A. German people shake hands as often as possible. B. English people like shaking hands very much.

C. German people hardly shake hands. D. Neither English people nor Germans like shaking hands. ( )5. This story is about _______.

A. shaking hands B. languages C. customs D. languages and customs

Unit 6 How long have you been collecting shells?

【1】Every hour they skate, each student raises ten yuan for charity.每位学生每溜冰一个小时就能为慈善事业筹到10元钱。

every 和each 都表示―每一个‖,但every是指整体,each是指每个个体。



(1) 结构:have/has + been + V.ing.

(2) 用法:表示从过去某一时刻开始,一直延续到现在且很有可能持续下去;

I‘ve been doing the cleaning all this morning.表示从过去开始一直持续到现在的某一动作刚刚结束; You‘re late again! I‘ve been waiting here for an hour.

表示一个一直到说话时为止的一段时间内一再重 97

复的动作。 I have been calling you several times in two days.

(3) 时间状语:all the time/this morning, since morning, all night, this week/month, recently 等

(3) 对现在完成进行时的时间状语进行提问时使用how long。 How long have you been skating?

I‘ve been skating for 5 years old.

2. 现在完成进行时与现在完成时区别:


I have written a letter to my father.(到现在信已写完)我给我的父亲写了一封信。

I have been writing a letter to my father.

再看:I wrote a letter to my father. 我给我的父亲写过一封信。

【3】.each 的用法:1)adj.各个的,各自的,每一个的。置于单数可数名词之前。如,Each car has a steering wheel.每辆汽车都有方向盘。2)pron.各个,各自。谓语动词用单数形式。如,Each has his own task.每个人都有自己的工作。

Each, every: each指两个或两个以上的人或事物中的―每个‖;every指三个以上的人或事物的全体,和all的意思相近;every只修饰单数名词,谓语动词用单数,each为形容词修饰单数名词,谓语动词为单数。作代词,单独使用,接单数动词,放在复数名词和代词后作同位语,接复数谓语动词;代表each与every的物主代词可以用his也可以用their.

【扩展】each of之后接名词或代词的复数形式,接名词时一定要附加the或my等词,即―each of+代词的复数形式‖或―each of+the/my+名词的复数形式‖,但谓语动词要用单数形式。如,Each of them has an idea of that.对此每个人各有见解。

【4】.含有half的表达方式:数词+名词(单/复数)+and +a half; 数词+and+a half+名词(复数)

【5】.Because, since, as, for:四个词都表示―原因‖的连词。以上连词的语气由强到弱依次为because-since-as-for其中because,since,as从属连词,引导原因状语从句;for为并列连词,连接两个并列句。a)because―因为‖,表示直接原因回答why的提问,一般放在主句之后,可单独存在。b)since―因为‖―既然‖,侧重主句从句表示虽然的或已知的理由。如,Since everyone is here, let‘s begin.c)as―由于‖,主从句并重,从句说明原因,主句说明结果。As it was late, I must hurry up.d)for―因为,由于‖,表明附加或推断的理由,引导的从句前常有逗号,for从句不放在句首。He must be ill, for he isn‘t here today.

【6】.thank you for +n./v.ing感谢某人(做)某事,多用于事情已发生的场合;与will连用,表示请求,要求;thank you to +v. 感谢做某事,多用于事情未发生的场合; thanks to+n.多亏…,由于

【7】.Teach的用法:teach sb sth教某人学某事;teach doing教导做…, 教…;teach sb to do教某人做某事;teach sb+that从句 教育人….


Whether it rains or not, they decide to go.

if not..如果不是…,表示惊讶或憎恶等情绪;if only意为―若…那就好了,我多么希望…‖相当于how I wish;only..if..意为―决不…除非…‖

If it hadn‘t been for the doctor‘s care, I should not be speaking to you now.如果不是医生的照顾,我现在就不会和你说话了。

If only he arrives in time!若他及时到达就好了。

I‘ll only come if you promise me that you won‘t invite Henry.除非你答应不请亨利,否则我不会来。



( )1. I‘ve been learning English ___seven years ____ . A. for, old B. since, old C. since, ago D. for, ago

( )2. _________ you learn, _________ you will be .

A. The more, the cleverer B. The much, the clever C. The many, the cleverer D. Much, clever

( )3. When he finished __________ , he __________ a walk .

A. reading, talked B. to clean , took C. his homework, was taking D. reading, took

( )4. My hobby is __________ the violin and ________ on the computer .

A. play, work B. playing , work C. playing , working D. play , working

( )5. There ________ no room to store the globes(地球仪) because I ___________ the boxes.

A. is, ran out of B. was, ran out of C. were, ran out of D. is, run out

( ) 6. The movie is ___________ , and Joan is___________ in it .

A. interesting , interesting B. interested, interested C. interesting, interested D. interested, interesting 98

( )7.. My mother bought a globe ________ me _________ my eighth birthday .

A. to, for B. for , on C. to , on D. for , to

( )8. Mr Smith __________ at this school since he ________ Xiamen .

A. has been teach, came B. has been teaching, came C. taught, came D. has been teaching, has come

( ) 9. This pair of shoes __________ very nice _________ expensive .

A. are, but B. is , but C. are , and D. is , and

( )10. –When did you start skating? - ___________________ .

A. Since two years ago B. Since I was nine years old C. For six hours D. Five years ago

( )11. - Was this your first ____ marathon ? - No, I ______ in a marathon last year .

A. skating , skated B. skate, skated C. skating , was skate D. skate, did skate

( )12. China is a great country ____ a long history . A. has B. have C. having D. with

( )13. He thought he ________ the first one ___________ the mountain .

A. was , to climb B. is , to climb C. was , climbing D. is climbing


A: Hi, Lisa. What are you doing ? B: I‘m _____ the piano. I‘m going to _____ my piano lesson this evening . A: How long have you been _________ the piano? B:_____last year. I‘m very _______in it .

A: ______ _____ do you play it ? B: I play every day . And I always play for one hour a day .

A: You‘re hard-working. ________ do you want to be in the future ?

B: Maybe I‘ll be an pianist. I enjoy music .

Unit 7 Would you mind turning down the music?

【1】Would you mind turning down the music? 你介不介意把音乐声关小呢?

Would you mind (not) doing sth.? 你介不介意做(不做)…?

= Would/Could you please (not) do sth.? 请你做(不做)…好吗?

1)Would you mind doing?=Do you mind doing..?―你介意…?‖ ―请你…好不好?‖是一种比较客气的表达方式。Would you mind opening the window? 2)如果要表示―请你不要做…好吗?‖只需在doing 前面加not. Would you mind not sitting in front of me?;应答用语:1)如果同意表示不介意时,可用如下用语来表达:Certainly not.; Of course not.;No,not at all.;Not at all.―好,可以‖2)如果不同意表示介意时,常用―Sorry.‖―I‘m sorry, but…‖及陈述某种理由来表示拒绝或反对。;这一句型中的逻辑主语只能是谈话的对方you,如果想要对方允许自己做某事,可以用 ―Would you mind my doing..?

【2】I can‘t stand it. 我无法忍受。

I can‘t stand to see good food to waste. 我无法忍受看着好食物被浪费。

【3】Would you mind keeping your voice down? 你介不介意把音量放小呢?

voice: 名词,指说话和唱歌地嗓音; talk in a loud voice 高声交谈

noise: 名词,指人们不愿听到地噪音;

sound: 名词,泛指自然界一切可以听到的声音。

【4】put on, wear, dress,have on, in: put on强调动作过程―穿上‖为瞬间动词;wear表示结果或状态―穿着‖,持续动词;dress强调穿的动作,后面不能跟宾语(衣服)等,还可以作名词,意思是―服装‖,dress up化装,dress oneself 给某人穿衣服,dress in穿衣服,have on表示―穿…‖,相当于wear,但没有进行时态;in介词,后跟表示颜色的名词,表示穿着某种颜色的衣服。

【5】very, too, so, quite以上几个副词均修饰形容词,副词表示程度,―很,太,非常‖;very应用最普遍―很‖,只是一个表示程度的副词,它表示的程度比quite要强得多,very只用来修饰形容词和副词的原级;too―太‖,一般表示―相对某人而言‖;so―如此…,那么…‖,往往表明某一事物的程度时,会引起另一种后果。换言之,so所修饰的人或物表示原因后面会有表示结果的句子。So…that…如此…以致于;quite既可以表示充分肯定,意思是 ―完全;十分‖,也可以表示程度,意思是―完全,十分‖,也可以表示程度,意思是―相当‖,quite可修饰动词,v.ing,形容词,副词,分词等。quite a +adj+n. a very+adj.+n

【6】put away收好,储蓄,放弃;put down放下,扑灭,写下;put…into…把…翻译成…;put off延期;put up举起,张贴,修建;put on穿上,上演

【7】See的用法:1)see+从句,意为―看到…,留意…‖如,I saw that you weren‘t among the students.2)see sb do sth.看到某人做某事;see sb doing看到某人正在做某事;see+名词 看到

【8】take care意为―当心‖,可单独使用或后接从句和动词不定式。同义词组为be careful和look out;take a seat坐下同义词组为sit down;take an interest in对…感兴趣;take away拿走,使离开,消失;take back收回(语言,话语);take care of照顾,注意,保养;take charge of负责,接管;take down拿下来,取下来,记下来,拆除;take for granted 想当然,认为,后接宾语从句,此时常以it作形式宾语;

take hold of 99

抓住;take in接受,理解,包括;take off脱下,匆匆离开,起飞,停止使用;take office就职;take on接受,雇佣;take out取出,带。..出来;take part in参加;take place发生,没有被动语态;take pride in为。..感到自豪;take sb‘s place代替某人;take up从事,占用;take it easy不要过于紧张,别着急


一. 根据下列各句的含义,选择适当的短语,用其适当的形式填空。

wash the dishes put on turn down the TV make some posters make dinners clean my room get out of the bathroom babysit her little cousin right away lend your car

1.Sorry, I‘ll do it __________.

2.I have to ____________every day.

3.OK. I‘ll __________ another pair of jeans.

4.I‘ll __________ in a minute.

5.Could you ______________ our company?

6.My mother told me to ___________ after dinner.

7.Her aunt asked her to ____________ last Sunday morning.

8. Would you mind __________ to me? I want to go to my friend‘s party.

9. Would you please __________? Linda is answering the telephone.

10.I often __________for my parents because I‘m good at cooking.



A: Would you mind _____(1) watching TV this evening? You have to help me.

B: OK, aunt. I‘ll _____ (2) the TV _____(3). What can I do for you?

A: Could you _____(4) your little cousin? I have to get some milk for your cousin.

B: Sure._____(5) my listening to music with my cousin?

A: No, _____(6). I‘ll be back _____(7)


When the Americans were getting ready to send their first man to the moon, an old Irishman (爱尔兰人) was _____ them on TV in a hotel room. There was an Englishman in the room_____. And he said to the Irishman, ―The Americans are very _____, aren‘t? they are going to send some men to the moon. It‘s a very _____ way from our world.‖ ―Oh, that‘s _____,‖the Irishman answered quickly.‖ ―The Irishman are going to send some men to the sun in months‘ _____. That‘s much _____ away than the moon, you know. ―The Englishman was very _____ when he heard this. ―Oh, yes it is,‖ he said, ―But the sun is too _____ for people to visit.‖

The Irishman laughed and answered, ―Well, the Irish are clever, too, you know. We ______ go to the sun during the day, of course. We‘ll go there during the night.‖

( )1.A. reading B. watching C. making D. mending

( )2.A. too B. also C. of course D. only

( )3. A. kind B. bad C. clever D. good

( )4. A. short B. long C. far D. near

( )5. A. nothing B. all C. wrong D. great

( )6. A. later B. ago C. long ago D. time

( )7.A. far B. never C. farther D. longer

( )8.A. angry B. surprised C. glad D. sorry

( )9.A. warm B. big C. cold D. hot

( )10. A. don‘t B. won‘t C. want to D. must

Unit 8 Why don’t you get her a scarf?

【1】Why don‘t you get her a scarf? 为什么不给她买条围巾呢?

get sb. sth. for … 为了… 给某人买某物= get sth. to sb. for…

【2】Now she‘s too big to sleep in the house. 现在她太大了不能睡在屋子里。

too… to …:太…以致于不能…= so… that 主语 can‘t ….

e.g. He is too young to go to school. = He is so young that he can‘t go to school.

= He isn‘t old enough to go to school. = He is very young and he can‘t go to school.

注意:too…to…是一个简单句,而so…that…是一个复合句。并且当复合句中的主句主语和从句主语不同时,在句型中要用for sb.来表述。如:

The digital camera is so expensive that we can‘t buy it.= The digital camera is too expensive for us to buy. = The digital camera isn‘t cheap enough for us to buy.


= The digital camera is very expensive and we can‘t buy it.

【3】My shoes were really cheap. They only cost $5. 我的鞋子真的很便宜。只要花5美圆。




spend :花费(时间、金钱)主语为人。

【4】Why don‘t you get her a scarf?= Why not get her a scarf? 为什么不给她买条围巾呢?

How/What about doing sth.? 做…怎么样呢?

How/What about + (a/an) + n.? …怎么样呢?

【5】Would you mind (not) doing sth.? 你介不介意做(不做)…?

= Would/Could you please (not) do sth.? 请你做(不做)…好吗?


【6】instead, instead of: instead为副词,在句中独立作状语,instead of为介词短语,后面一般接名词,代词,介词和接动词-ing形式。



( )1. When _____ there be a meeting? - Tomorrow afternoon. Don‘t be late. A. does B. will C. is D. was ( )2. – How long_________ you_________? I have been coughing for two days.

A did; cough B. are; coughing C. have; been coughing D. have; coughed

( )3.– How long haven‘t you seen him? -I haven‘t seen him __ last Sunday. A. for B. on C. since D. from ( )4. This is an _________ place. I‘m __________ in it.

A. interesting, interested B. interested, interesting C. interesting, interesting D. interested, interested ( )5. ______ you mind cleaning the room after dinner? A. Would B. Could C. Should D. Might ( )6. – What did she say? - She said she ____ to Beijing for a trip.

A. will go B. was go C. was going D. would going

( )7. – would you mind moving the box? - Sorry. I‘ll move it ________.

A. right away B. right once C. right on D. right way

( )8. ________ should I get Mr. Green for his birthday? A. Why B. How C. What D. When ( )9. – I don‘t like the scarf. It‘s too personal as a gift. - ____________ a bottle of wine?

A. What B. How about C. What of D. Why not

( )10. Tony is too young to __________ himself. A. take care of B. take care C. care D. look for ( )11. I have been playing computer games __________ two hours. A. since B. for C. by D. in

( )12. The actors are playing ___ money for charity. A. for raising B. to raise C. raising D. raise to ( )13. – Here‘s a flying kite for you. - Great. Thanks for ___ it for me.

A. make B. made C. to make D. making

( )14. – I like skating very much. ___ the way, what‘s your hobby? - Oh, collecting stamps is my favorite.

A. On B.In C. By D.At

( )15. I didn‘t finish my homework because I _____ time.

A. ran out in B. ran out of C. ran out from D. ran out to

( )16. – Would you mind ___ so much noise? A. not to B. not make C. not making D. not to making ( )17. The baby is sleeping. Would you mind ________ your radio?

A. turning up B. turning down C. turning on D. turning off

( )18. I get angry when people _______ in line. A. keep B. wait C. break D. cut

( )19. Could you _______ not shout in the street? A. please B. like C. love D. mind

( )20. I get __ when someone talks to me while I am reading. A. annoying B. annoyed C. annoy D. annoys ( )21. My little brother is ______ young ______ go to school. A. too; to B. so; to C. so; that D. such ; to ( )22. Lucy is a _________ child. She can‘t look after herself.

A. two- years-old B. two years old C. two-year-old D. two year old

( )23. I would rather ________ than _________.

A. play basketball; to play tennis B. playing basketball; to play tennis

C. play basketball; play tennis D. to play basketball; to play tennis

( )24. My mother _____ in the kitchen when the phone rang. A. is B. is cooking C. was cooking D. cooked ( )25. _____ in the library is not allowed. A. talk loud B. talking loudly C. talk loudly D. talks loud 101

( )26. I‘m afraid I can‘t really agree ______ you. A. to B. on C. with D. about

( )27. Look! They __________ baseball now. A. play B. played C. are playing D. will play ( )28. A new company will be built here _________.

A. from ten months B. in ten months C. after ten months D. before ten months

( )29. -Would you mind turning down the music? - _____. A. Yes B. Sure C. Certainly D. No, not at all. ( )30. Nicole didn‘t go out. ___________, he watched TV at home. a. But b. However c. When d. Instead 完型填空 (15)

Look! The woman ____1___ TV ____2____ to us from the Hilltop school skating marathon. There, students __3__ to raise money for charity. For ___4____ hour the skate, each student ______5__ ten yuan for ___6_____. The skating marathon has been ___7______ for five hours now, and several ____8_____ are ____9____ skating. Alison was the _10____ one ___11_____ , and has been skating for the _____12____ five hours. Next is Sam, and he ____13____ for four hours. Lining has been skating for four hours, _______14______. And Li Chen just started an hour ____15____.

( )1. A. from B. on C. in D. to

( )2. A. talks B. is talk C. talking D. is talking

( )3. A. skate B. skated C. are skating D. were skating

( )4. A. every B. each C. all D. whole

( )5. A. for raise B. raising C. to raise D. raises

( )6. A. fun B. food C. charity D. healthy

( )7. A. go B. goes C. going D. went

( )8. A. skates B. skater C. skaters D. skating

( )9. A still B. also C. too D. for

( )10. A. first B. second C. third D. one

( )11. A. starting B. for start C. to start D. start

( )12. A. whole B. all C. each D. every

( )13. A. is skating B. has skating C. has been skating D. skates

( )14. A. too B. also C. still D. to

( )15. A. before B. ago C. each D. too

Unit 9 Have you ever been to an amusement park?


用法:动作到现在已经完成或刚刚完成;过去发生或已完成的动作对现在造成的结果和影响; 过去开始一直持续到现在的动作或状态。

基本结构:have/has + V.过去分词

时间状语:already, yet, just, ever, never, once, twice, so far, ever since, for a long time, for + 一段时间, since + 过去的时间点/过去时的从句,等。

注意事项: A. 现在完成时是现在的时态,重点表达目前的结果和状态;

B. 表示动作从过去开始持续到现在用for + 时间段, since +点时间连用。for与since短语提问用how long。

C. 现在完成时从不与when引起的疑问句联用。

D. have been to:去过… have gone to:去了… have been in:呆在…

E. 短暂性动词变为延续性动词:

buy --- have had borrow --- have kept

join --- have been in / have been a member of

become --- have been a member make friends --- have been friends

die --- have been dead get to know --- have known

come/go to do --- have done catch a cold --- have had a cold

begin/start to do --- have done begin / start --- have been on

enter / come / arrive / get to / reach --- have been in/at

go / leave for / set off / set out --- have been away from


since 后接过去的时间点或一般过去时的从句。

He has been an English teacher since three years ago.


We have known each other since we came to study in this university.


He has lived here for three years.


现在完成时表示过去发生的某一动作对现在造成的影响和结果,强调的是现在的情况,所以它不能和表示过去的时间状语连用,如:yesterday, last night, three weeks ago, in 1990等。

而一般过去时只表示过去的动作或状态,和现在不发生关系,它可以和表示过去的时间状语连用。如: He has lived here since 1992. 1992年以来他一直住在这里。(他现在还住在这里)

He lived here in 1992. 1992年他住在这里。(并不涉及他现在是否住在这里)

现在完成时表示发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果。通Have you ever been to a water park? 你曾经去过水上公园吗?

No, I haven‘t. 不,我没有。 我也没有。

这是一个否定的省略句。它的结构是― Neither/Nor + be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语‖。而用在肯定的省略句中时要使用so,它的结构是―So+ be动词/助动词/情态动词‖。如:

-- I paid 20 yuan for this book.

-- So did I.


一、练习:此题考察目的:have been to/have gone to 在用法上的区别。

Put in has/have been or has/have gone. 填入has /have been 或has/have gone.

1. Harry: I saw you in Annabel‘s Restaurant last night.

Diana: No, it wasn‘t me. I there.

2. Sam: Sally and Tim are on holiday, aren‘t they? Where _____ they _____?

Sue: To Florida, again.

Sam: How many times ______ they __________ there?

Sue: This is their third visit.

3. Joe: Can I have an apple, please?

Mary: We haven‘t got any. I ______n‘t _____ to the shops today.

4. Alan: Where‘s Tony?

Mary: He‘s got a headache so he _____________ to bed.

5. Steve: (on the phone) Can I speak to Jill, please?

Lynn: She‘s out, I‘m afraid. She __________ to the cinema this evening.

Steve: Again? She ________ already __________ to the cinema three times this week.


( )1. Li Hong has ______ the army for 2 years. A. joined B. joined to C. been in D. joined in

( )2. We have been friends since ___. A. children B. five years C. five years ago D. five years before ( )3. Mike ____ the story for a month. A. Has bought B. Has had C. had had D. has borrowed ( )4. You ______ that question three times.

A. already asked B. have already asked C. already have asked D. asked already

( )5. Those foreign friends left Guangzhou __________.

A. since last week B. a week ago C. for a week D. since a week ago

( )6. I ____ at this school for two years already. A. am studying B. study C. studied D. have studied ( )7. They _______ in the city since last summer. A. live B. didn‘t live C. have lived D. live

( )8. Mrs. Wang has lived in Haikou _________ 1992. A. since B. from C. after D. in

( )9. Mr. Black _ China since the summer of 1998. A. has been to B. has been in C. has come to D. came to ( )10. You‘d better go on ________ English. A. study B. studied C. studying D. to study

( )11. You have never been to the Great Wall, _____ you? A. do B. don‘t C. have D. haven‘t

( )12. His father _______ for years. A. has died B. has been dead C. died D. dies

( )13. Mary ________ to see the films because she __________ it twice.

A. won‘t go, saw B. won‘t go, will see C. won‘t go, has seen D. didn‘t go, sees

( )14. _____ you ______ some more food? Thank you. I _______ enough.

A. will have,had B. Do have,have had C. Dohave , have D. Do have, had

( )15. ______ you ______ England? Yes, it _____ a beautiful country.

A. Will , gone to, was B.Have , been to, is C. had ,been to, is D. Have ,gone to, is

( )16. ----_____ you ____ to the capital? ---No, I ______.I ______ there early next month.


A. Have,been, haven‘t, am going B. Had, been, hadn‘t, am going

C. Have, gone, haven‘t, was going D. Did,go, didn‘t, was going

( )17. ---You sister ______ to London to study English. Is that true? ---Yes , she ___ there for two months.

A. has been, has been B. will go, has gone C. gone, will be D. has gone, has been

( )18. Bruce ___ how to use a computer. He__a computer of his own. He ___ it two days ago

A. learns, will get, bought B. is learning, has got, bought

C. learned, has got, bought D. is learning, got, has bought

( )19. --You haven‘t read the book before, have you? --_______.

A. Yes , I haven‘t. B. No, I have. C. Yes, I do. D. No, I haven‘t.

( )20. —Where is Li Lei? —He ___ Shanghai. A. has gone to B. has been to C. went to D. goes to ( )21.John will write to us as soon as he _______ there. A.. gets B. will get C. got

( )22.Look, the boy _______ ! A.. smile B. smiled C. is smiling

( )23.Jane is busy now. She _______ pictures. A.. draws B. drew C. is drawing

( )24.He ___ his homework and is now listening to music. A.. finishes B. has finished C. finish ( )25.We are going to take some pictures if __ tomorrow. A.. it will rain B. it rains C. it doesn't rain ( )26.This kind of bike _______ in China. A.. makes B. made C. is made

( )26.English _______in many countries. A.. is speaking B. is spoken C. has spoken

( )27.The TV set _______ in Japan. A.. made B. makes C. is made

( )28.The floor of our classroom _______ every day. A.. is cleaned B. cleaned C. has cleaned ( )29.The story____ down and became world famous. A.. was written B. has written C. wrote ( )30._______ I get up at six tomorrow? No, you needn‘t. A.. May B. Can C. Must

( )31.You __return the book now. You can keep it until next week. A.. can't B. mustn't C. needn't ( )32.You are very ill, so you _______ stay in bed for a week. A. Can B. need C. must

( )33.I'll give the letter to her ____ she comes back. A.. as soon as B. before C. since

( )34.Tom was born ______ May 3rd, 1985. A.. in B. at C. on

( )35.Can you let me ________home a little earlier? A.. go B. going C. to go

( )36.The teacher told us _____ in the street. A.. not to play B. not play C. don't play

【2】.practice doing练习做某事;go doing sth去做某事;like doing sth喜欢做某事;forget doing sth忘记做过事情;remember doing sth记得做过某事;stop doing sth停止做某事;finish doing sth完成做某事;enjoy doing sth喜爱做某事;keep doing sth连续不断地做某事;mind doing sth介意做某事



( )1.Have you ever traveled to_____ province of China? A. the other B. another C. other D. others

( )2.I discovered that the most important reguirement was ______ English well

A. speak B. to speak C. say D. to say

( )3.Would you like ______ to the theater now? A. going B. went C. to go D. goes

( )4. Does Pingping speak English as_____ as Alice? A. better B. best C. good D. well

( )5.Of all the units, Unit 1 is__________.

A.the most interested B.more interesting C.the most interesting D.interesting

( )6._____ fish, we eat meat,vegetables and so on. A. Except B. Besides C. Between D. Among

( )7.I have learnt _____ twenty English songs. A. a few B. many C. more D. over

( )8.My father isn‘t at home He has_____ to Beijing. A. been B. gone C. went D. going

( )9.---Have you ever _____ to Beijing? -----Yes, I ______ there last year.

A. been, went B. gone, went C. went, went D. gone,gone

( )10.There are many trees on _____ sides of the river. A. each B. every C. all D. both

二、用所给词填空( show, decide, improve, take rent )

1.I haven‘t _____________ where to go on vacation.

2.Your English is much better now. You have ______________ a lot.

3.That‘s a special cinema. It only _________________ foreign films.

4.You can __________________ bicycles at the park.

5. It _______________ me half an hour to clean my room yesterday.

三. 完成句子

1. 你可以在迪斯尼巡游船上兜风好几天。

You can ________ ________ _________ on Disney Cruise _________ several days.

2. 船的航程都是走不同的路线,但都是在同一地方结束。

The boat ______ all ______ ______ ______ but they all ______ ______ in the same place.


3. 我当空服员两年了。I ________ ________ ____________ ___________ ___________ for two years.

4. 请告诉我你是喜欢中餐还是西餐。Please tell me _________ you like Chinese food ________ Western food.

5. 超过四分之三的新加坡人口是中国人。

More than ___________ ____________ of the populatioon in Singapore are Chinese.

四. 阅读

( A ) Complete the letter

Dear Susan,

I haven‘t r_______ your letter from you for a long time. Why not c____ to China? It is a country with beautiful cities. The food here is d_______ .Hotels aren‘t e__________ at all. There are all k_____ of shops full of many different products. You can also go to some old markets to buy w____ you want.

Besides, you can go to one of the finest b______ to swim or to have a rest. If you come here, I b_______ you will have a very exciting h______ . Please write to me s_____.

( B )

One day a visitor came to Walley‘s house. ―I am your cousin from London,‖he said, ― and I have brought you a goose to celebrate the visit.‖ Walley

Excited. He asked his wife to cook the goose and made a fine dinner.

The next day another visitor arrived. ―I‘m the friend of the man who brought you the goose.‖ He said. Wally in inveited him in and gave him a good meal. The next day another visitor arrived, and said he was the friend of the friend of the man who brought the goose. Again Wally invited him for a meal. However, he was getting annoyed. His house seemed to be a restaurant.

The another visitor came, and said he was the friend of the friend of the friend of the man who brought the goost. Wally invited him to eat dinner with him. His wife brought some soup to the table and the visitor tasted it. ―What kind of soup is this?‖ asked the visitor. ―It takes just like warm water.‖ ―Ah!‖ said Wally, ―That is the soup of the soup of the soup of the goose.‖

( )1. How many of the visitors brought a goose? A. 1 B. 3 C. 4 D. 2

( )2. Guess the meaning of ―annoyed‖ according to the passage. A. 烦恼 B. 高兴 C. 愤怒 D. 喜欢

( )3. Which of the following is NOT true?

A. Wally kew the first visitor. B. The second visitor is the friend of the first visitor.

C. The last visitor didn‘t drink the soup of the goose. D. The last visitor drank the soup.

( )4. Why did Wally get angry?

A. He didn't like eating goose. B. The visitors ate his four geese.

C. The first visitor brought a goose, but the others didn‘t bring anything.

D. His house seemed to be a restaurant.

( )5. How did Wally solve(解决) the problem?

A. He served(招待) soup, but it tasted of nothing, so that no visitors would like to come to his house again.

B. He served good soup, so that everyone would want to eat at his house.

C. He opened a restaurant. D. He didn‘t serve the last visitor.

Unit 10 It’s a nice day, isn’t it?

【1】I hope so. 我希望如此。

so为代词,用来表示赞同前面所提及的内容。除了hope以外,还有think,believe,suppose,be afraid等,可与so连用。如:Do you think it will rain this afternoon? 你认为下午会下雨吗?

I think/believe/suppose/hope/am afraid so. 我想/相信/猜/希望/恐怕会。


I don‘t think so. 我不这么想。

I hope/suppose/am afraid not. 我希望/猜/恐怕不会这样。

1. 那件衬衫多少钱?


使用反意疑问句时的注意事项:(1).前后两部分要在人称上保持一致。(2).时态要保持一致(或动词要保持一致)(3).回答的一致性(特别注意中文翻译)。注意:yes与no后面的回答部分要一致。(4).在祈使句后进行附加疑问句时,用will you表示请求。(5).在Let‘s后面,常用shall we,表示征询意见。在Let us…后面进行附加疑问时,用will you,这一点属于祈使句范围。(6) 在英语口语中,I am 后面的附加疑问句部分常用aren‘t I .(7) 由nothing作主语的句子,附加问句中人称代词用it.(8).由nobody作主语的句子,附加问句中用they代替nobody.(9).如果陈述句部分主语是

everyone,someone,anyone,no 105

one等不定代词,其附加疑问句部分的主语可以用he,也可用they.(10) There be…后面的附加疑问句部分仍用there. (11).如果陈述句部分含有否定副词never,few,little等词时,则其附加疑问句部分用肯定形式。J.反意疑问句要求用yes或no来回答,当陈述句部分为否定形式时,回答要特别注意两种语言的表达习惯的不同,注意根据实际情况前后保持一致。


1. You‘re a farmer, _______ ________?

2. The weather isn‘t fine, ________ ________?

3. Kate came here last month, _______ ________?

4. I don‘t think Tom is at home, _______ ________?

5. There weren‘t enough nuts, ________ ________?

6. There‘s a pen in the pencil-box, ________ ________?

7. The man had bread for lunch, _________ _________?

8. Mary can speak little English , ________ _________?

9. Nothing is wrong with the watch, _______ ________?

10. Open the door, _______ ________?

11. Let‘s be friends, _______ ________?

12. Let us go, ________ ________?

13. I‘m your good student, ________ _______?

14. He must be at home, ________ ________?

15. You‘re going to have a meeting, ________ ________?

16.The weather in China_______ very cold, isn‘t _______?

17.It‘s summer in Australia now, _ _____ ______?

18. There is little water in the glass, __________ ________?

19.Jim knows the way Australia speak, ________ ______?

20. ______ knows little about the weater in Sydney,______ she?

【3】Prepare的用法:1)prepare for为…做准备,相当于get ready for2)prepare+名词+for +名词,意思为―为…准备…‖.3)prepare+名词+to do sth意思为―为…而做准备。‖4)prepare to do准备做某事



( )1. The foreign visitors have been in Nartony for _________ three weeks.

A. more than B. than C. more D. more and more

( )2. I can _________ swim _______ skate. Will you please teach me?

A. either …or B. not only…but also C. both …and D. neither …nor

( ) 3. -Can I try it on? -I‘m ____________ you can.

A. sure B. be sure C. make sure D. surely

( )4. -We are free this afternoon. Let‘s go to play computer games.

-Well, I think I‘d better watch an English program ________.

A. too B. either C. then D. instead

( )5. -How are you getting on with your work? -I can‘t do it ___ any longer, I‘ll have to get help.

A. singly B. quietly C. alone D. hard

( )6. I learned _________ Russian at middle school.

A. a bit B. bit of C. a bit of D. little of the

( )7. Children are standing ________ and getting on the bus.

A. on line B. in a line C. on a line D. in line

( )8. You shouldn‘t wait here, ____________ you can go and ask Jim why.

A. at the beginning B. in the end C. at first D. at least

( )9. The book is __________. Most of the teachers are _________ in it.

A. interesting, interested B. interesting, interesting C. interested, interesting D. interested, interested ( ) 10. Few of them hurt themselves in the accident last night , __________.

A. don‘t they B. didn‘t they C. did they D. do they

( )11. -Are you going to Beijing by plane? – It‘s fast , but expensive. So I am not sure,I ___ take a train.

A.should B. may C. must D. will

( )12.-What a hot day! Have you had a drink ? -Yes, But I‘d like to have ____ after work.

A. it B. one C. other D. another

( )13. –Nancy, how long does it take to fly to Canada?

-Sorry , I don‘t know . But I can telephone my father to ___ it for you..


A. do B. check C. catch D. find

( )14. –Whom would you like to be your assistant, Jack and David ?

-- If I had to choose, David would be _____ choise.

A. good B. better C. the better D. the best

A: . B: Really? What places have you been to?

A: Very few. I‘ve only been to Pingyao. B:

A: It‘s in Shanxi. It‘s a small place, but it has a long history. It‘s one of the oldest towns in China. There you can see a well-kept city wall.

B: I‘ve just seen a lot of natural beauties, but not much old Chinese culture (文化)yet. A: .

三. 完成句子:

1. 看起来他的确赢了那场比赛。 It ______ that he _________ that match.

2. 他昨天告诉了我一些关于汤姆的一些事。 He _______ me something ________ Tom yesterday.

3. 做班里拔尖学生不容易。 It isn‘t ___________ the top students in the class.

4. 谢谢你邀请我参加你的聚会。 ___________ me _________ your party.

5. 中国人对外国朋友很友好。Chinese ___________ always _________ foreign guests.

6. 你能帮我搬这个大盒子吗? _______ you _____ me __________ the heavy box?

7. 我们学校至少有1500名同学。 _______ are _______ 1500 students in our school.

8. 你和你的朋友们相处的如何? ________ are you _________ your friends?

9. 昨天我们举办了家宴。 Yesterday we __________

10. 我写完所有作业之后才开始看电视。I ____ until I ______ all my homework.

四. 完形填空:

Fire can help people in many ways. But it can also be very harmful (有害的). Fire can keep your house , give light and cook food. But fire can burn things . Big fire can burn, trees, houses, animals or people.

Nobody knows how people began to use fire. But there are interesting old stories about how a man or woman started a fire. One is

a man. The man a very long time ago. He went up the sun and fire down.

Today people know how to make a fire with matches (火柴). Children sometimes to play with them. But matches can be very dangerous. One match can burn a piece of paper. and it could burn a house. A small fire can turn a big fire. very quickly. So you be careful with matches.

Be careful with fire, and it will you. But if you aren‘t careful with fire. and it may hurt you. ( )1. A. warm B. warmer C. cool D. cooler

( )2. A. also B. too C. either D. neither

( )3. A. many B. much C. little D. no

( )4. A. over B. about C. a little D. no

( )5. A. worked B. studied C. learned D. lived

( )6. A. bring B. take C. brought D. took

( )7. A. enjoy B. like C. don‘t like D. become

( )8. A. after B. late C. yet D. then

( )9. A. can B. man C. will D. must

( )10. A. help B. do C. tell D. hope

五. 阅读短文,然后回答下面的问题。

Jim Green has been in China for more than two years. He has been to many interesting places in Beijing, but he has not yet been to many other parts of China. Last week he went to Mount Emei in Sichuan Province with his family.

Many people like to travel by air, but Jim‘s family think that travelling by train is the best. It is much

cheaper and far more enjoyable than a rushed trip by air. They had a wonderful train ride to Chengdu before they went on to Mount Emei by bus.

Early one morning, they took a taxi to Beijing West Railway Station. The station was very lively. There were bookshops, food shops and stores selling all kinds of things. Mrs. Green bought some fruit, food and bottles of water to take on the train. She said that it was better to get some food before they got on the train because food 107

on the train was usually too expensive.

The train was quite comfortable, and there weren‘t too many people in their sleeping car. The Greens could stand up and walk around. It was a long journey, but none of them felt tired. They kept watching the beautiful scenery out of the window. They walked, laughed and played cards. The conductor kept coming to offer them hot water and selling them magazines. People nearby talked with each other. A young man practiced speaking English with Mr. Green. Jim thought the train was like a big moving party. He went to sleep quite late. He listened to the click of the rails and then fell fast asleep.

When Jim woke up the next morning, the train was already near Chengdu. His train ride seemed really short, but his memory of the pleasant trip will last long.

1. How long has Jim been in China?

2. Where did Jim go to travel with his family?

3. Why does Jim‘s family like to travel by train?

4. What did Mrs. Green buy before getting on the train?

5. Did the Greens feel tired on the train? Why or why not?

6. What did the Greens do on the trains ?


网站首页网站地图 站长统计
All rights reserved Powered by 海文库
copyright ©right 2010-2011。